Nortel 40M2420 Layer 2/3 GbE Switch Module Command Reference
விளம்பரம்
விளம்பரம்
Alteon OS
TM
Command Reference
Layer 2/3 GbE Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter
®
Version 1.3
Part Number: 40M2420, April 2007
2350 Mission College Blvd.
Suite 600
Santa Clara, CA 95054 www.bladenetwork.net
Alteon OS Command Reference
Copyright © 2007 Blade Network Technologies, Inc., 2350 Mission College Blvd., Suite 600, Santa Clara,
California, 95054, USA. All rights reserved. Part Number: 40M2420.
This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Blade Network Technologies, Inc. Documentation is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including any kind of implied or express warranty of non-infringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
U.S. Government End Users: This document is provided with a “commercial item” as defined by FAR
2.101 (Oct. 1995) and contains “commercial technical data” and “commercial software documentation” as those terms are used in FAR 12.211-12.212 (Oct. 1995). Government End Users are authorized to use this documentation only in accordance with those rights and restrictions set forth herein, consistent with FAR
12.211- 12.212 (Oct. 1995), DFARS 227.7202 (JUN 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7015 (Nov. 1995).
Blade Network Technologies, Inc. reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time, and without notice. Blade Network Technologies, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Blade Network
Technologies, Inc. The use and purchase of this product does not convey a license under any patent rights, trademark rights, or any other intellectual property rights of Blade Network Technologies, Inc.
Originated in the USA.
Alteon OS, and Alteon are trademarks of Nortel Networks, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Cisco
®
and EtherChannel
®
are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies.
2 40M2420, April 2007
Contents
Preface 13
The Command Line Interface 19
Factory-Default vs. MM assigned IP Addresses 20
Configuring management module for switch access 21
Connecting to the Switch via Telnet 23
Establishing an SSH Connection 24
Command Line History and Editing 29
First-Time Configuration 31
Information Needed For Setup 32
Starting Setup When You Log In 32
Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually 34
Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration 34
Setup Part 2: Port Configuration 36
40M2420, April 2007 3
Alteon OS Command Reference
Setup Part 4: IP Configuration 39
Optional Setup for Telnet Support 42
Changing the Default Administrator Password 43
Changing the Default User Password 45
Menu Basics 47
Command Line History and Editing 53
Command Line Interface Shortcuts 54
The Information Menu 55
SNMPv3 System Information Menu 59
SNMPv3 USM User Table Information 61
SNMPv3 View Table Information 62
SNMPv3 Access Table Information 63
SNMPv3 Group Table Information 64
SNMPv3 Community Table Information 64
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information 65
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information 66
SNMPv3 Notify Table Information 67
BladeCenter Chassis Information 69
Show Recent Syslog Messages 72
4 Contents 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database 77
Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information 78
Common Internal Spanning Tree Information 88
Show All IP Route Information 96
Show All ARP Entry Information 99
ARP Address List Information 99
OSPF Interface Information 104
OSPF Information Route Codes 106
Routing Information Protocol Information 107
Show RIP User Configuration 107
IGMP Multicast Group Information 109
IGMP Multicast Router Port Information 110
Quality of Service Information 113
Access Control List Information 115
Logical Port to GEA Port Mapping 118
Contents 5
Alteon OS Command Reference
The Statistics Menu 121
802.1x Authenticator Statistics 124
802.1x Authenticator Diagnostics 125
Interface Protocol Statistics 134
Routing Information Protocol Statistics 155
Management Processor Statistics 156
6 Contents 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
The Configuration Menu 169
Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes 172
System Host Log Configuration 177
RADIUS Server Configuration 179
TACACS+ Server Configuration 181
User Security Model Configuration 192
View-based Access Control Model Configuration 194
SNMPv3 Group Configuration 196
SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration 197
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration 198
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration 199
SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration 200
System Access Configuration 201
Management Networks Configuration 203
User Access Control Configuration 204
System User ID Configuration 205
Strong Password Configuration 206
HTTPS Access Configuration 207
Temporarily Disabling a Port 211
Re-Marking In-Profile Menu 214
Re-Marking Out-of-Profile Menu 216
40M2420, April 2007 Contents 7
Alteon OS Command Reference
802.1x Global Configuration 220
802.1x Guest VLAN Configuration 222
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration 225
Common Internal Spanning Tree Configuration 227
Spanning Tree Configuration 231
Spanning Tree Bridge Configuration 233
Spanning Tree Port Configuration 235
Forwarding Database Configuration 237
IP Trunk Hash Configuration 240
Layer 2 Failover Configuration 244
Failover Trigger Configuration 245
Auto Monitor Configuration 246
Protocol-based VLAN Configuration 249
Private VLAN Configuration 251
IP Interface Configuration 254
Default Gateway Configuration 255
IP Static Route Configuration 256
IP Multicast Route Configuration 257
IP Forwarding Configuration 260
Network Filter Configuration 261
IP Access List Configuration 264
Autonomous System Filter Path 265
Routing Information Protocol Configuration 266
Routing Information Protocol Interface Configuration 267
8 Contents 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Open Shortest Path First Configuration 269
OSPF Summary Range Configuration 272
OSPF Interface Configuration 273
OSPF Virtual Link Configuration 275
OSPF Host Entry Configuration 276
OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration 277
OSPF MD5 Key Configuration 278
Border Gateway Protocol Configuration 279
BGP Redistribution Configuration 283
BGP Aggregation Configuration 284
IGMP Snooping Configuration 286
IGMP Version 3 Configuration 287
IGMP Relay Multicast Router Configuration 289
IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration 290
IGMP Filtering Configuration 291
IGMP Filtering Port Configuration 293
IGMP Advanced Configuration 294
Domain Name System Configuration 295
Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration 296
Virtual Router Configuration 299
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration 301
Virtual Router Group Configuration 302
Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration 304
VRRP Interface Configuration 305
VRRP Tracking Configuration 306
Quality of Service Configuration 307
Access Control List Configuration 310
Ethernet Filtering Configuration 312
IP version 4 Filtering Configuration 313
TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration 314
Packet Format Filtering Configuration 315
Contents 9
Alteon OS Command Reference
Port Mirroring Configuration 318
Port-Mirroring Configuration 319
Saving the Active Switch Configuration 321
Restoring the Active Switch Configuration 321
The Operations Menu 323
Operations-Level Port Options 325
Operations-Level Port 802.1x Options 326
Operations-Level VRRP Options. 327
Operations-Level IP Options 328
Operations-Level BGP Options 328
The Boot Options Menu 329
Scheduled Reboot of the Switch 330
Updating the Switch Software Image 331
Loading New Software to Your Switch 331
Selecting a Software Image to Run 334
Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch 335
Selecting a Configuration Block 336
The Maintenance Menu 339
Forwarding Database Maintenance 343
IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance 348
10 Contents 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Syslog Messages 353
Alteon OS SNMP Agent 365
Working with Switch Images and
Loading a new switch image 369
Loading a saved switch configuration 370
Saving the switch configuration 370
Glossary 373
Index 1
Alteon OS Command Reference
40M2420, April 2007 Contents 11
Alteon OS Command Reference
12 Contents 40M2420, April 2007
Preface
The Alteon OS Command Reference describes how to configure and use the Alteon OS software with your Layer 2/3 GbE Switch Module.
For documentation on installing the switches physically, see the Installation Guide for your GbE Switch Module. For details about configuration and operation of your GbE Switch
Module, see the Alteon OS Application Guide.
40M2420, April 2007 13
Alteon OS Command Reference
Who Should Use This Book
This Command Reference is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in configuring and maintaining a network. The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet concepts, IP addressing, the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol, and SNMP configuration parameters.
14 Preface 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
How This Book Is Organized
Chapter 1 “The Command Line Interface,”
describes how to connect to the switch and access the information and configuration menus.
Chapter 2 “First-Time Configuration,”
describes how to use the Setup utility for initial switch configuration and how to change the system passwords.
provides an overview of the menu system, including a menu map, global commands, and menu shortcuts.
Chapter 4 “The Information Menu,”
shows how to view switch configuration parameters.
Chapter 5 “The Statistics Menu,”
shows how to view switch performance statistics.
Chapter 6 “The Configuration Menu,”
shows how to configure switch system parameters, ports, VLANs, Spanning Tree Protocol, SNMP, Port Mirroring, IP Routing, Port Trunking, and more.
Chapter 7 “The Operations Menu,”
shows how to use commands which affect switch performance immediately, but do not alter permanent switch configurations (such as temporarily disabling ports). The menu describes how to activate or deactivate optional software features.
Chapter 8 “The Boot Options Menu,”
describes the use of the primary and alternate switch images, how to load a new software image, and how to reset the software to factory defaults.
Chapter 9 “The Maintenance Menu,”
shows how to generate and access a dump of critical switch state information, how to clear it, and how to clear part or all of the forwarding database.
Appendix A, “Alteon OS Syslog Messages,”
shows a listing of syslog messages.
Appendix B, “Alteon OS SNMP Agent,”
lists the Management Interface Bases (MIBs) supported in the switch software.
includes definitions of terminology used throughout the book.
includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the book.
Preface 15
Alteon OS Command Reference
Typographic Conventions
The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book.
Table 1 Typographic Conventions
Typeface or
Symbol
Meaning
AaBbCc123 This type is used for names of commands, files, and directories used within the text.
Example
View the readme.txt file.
It also depicts on-screen computer output and prompts.
Main#
AaBbCc123 This bold type appears in command examples. It shows text that must be typed in exactly as shown.
Main# sys
<AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command examples as a parameter placeholder. Replace the indicated text with the appropriate real name or value when using the command. Do not type the brackets.
To establish a Telnet session, enter: host# telnet <IP address>
This also shows book titles, special terms, or words to be emphasized.
Read your User’s Guide thoroughly.
[ ] Command items shown inside brackets are optional and can be used or excluded as the situation demands. Do not type the brackets.
host# ls [-a]
16 Preface 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
How to Get Help
If you need help, service, or technical assistance, see the “Getting help and technical assistance” appendix in the Layer 2/3 GbE Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter
Installation Guide.
40M2420, April 2007 Preface 17
Alteon OS Command Reference
18 Preface 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
C HAPTER 1
The Command Line Interface
Your GbE Switch Module (GbESM) is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box. Some of the more advanced features, however, require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively.
The extensive Alteon OS switching software included in your switch provides a variety of options for accessing and configuring the switch:
A built-in, text-based command line interface and menu system for access via a Telnet session or serial-port connection
SNMP support for access through network management software such as IBM Director or
HP OpenView
Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI)
The command line interface is the most direct method for collecting switch information and performing switch configuration. Using a basic terminal, you are presented with a hierarchy of menus that enable you to view information and statistics about the switch, and to perform any necessary configuration.
This chapter explains how to access the Command Line Interface (CLI) for the switch.
19
Alteon OS Command Reference
Connecting to the Switch
You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways:
Using a Telnet via the management module
Using a Telnet connection over the network
Using a SSH connection to securely log into another computer over a network
Using a serial connection using the serial port on the GbESM
Management Module Setup
The BladeCenter GbE Switch Module is an integral subsystem within the overall BladeCenter system. The BladeCenter chassis includes a management module (MM) as the central element for overall chassis management and control.
You can use the 100 Mbps Ethernet port on the management module to configure and manage the GbE Switch Module. The GbE Switch Module communicates with the management module through its internal port 15 (MGT1) and port 16 (MGT2), which you can access through the
Ethernet port on the management module. The factory default settings will permit only management and control access to the switch module through the Ethernet port on the management module, or the built-in serial port. You can use the six external 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports on the switch module for management and control of the switch by selecting this mode as an option through the management module configuration utility program (see the applicable
BladeCenter Installation and User’s Guide publications for more information).
Factory-Default vs. MM assigned IP Addresses
Each GbE Switch Module must be assigned its own Internet Protocol address, which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other transmission control protocol/
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) applications (for example, BootP or TFTP). The factory-default IP address is 10.90.90.9x, where x corresponds to the number of the bay into which the GbE
20 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Switch Module is installed. For additional information, see the Installation Guide). The management module assigns an IP address of 192.168.70.1xx, where xx corresponds to the number of the bay into which each GbE Switch Module is installed, as shown in the following table:
Table 1-1 GbESM IP addresses, based on switch-module bay numbers
Bay number
Bay 1
Bay 2
Bay 3
Bay 4
Factory-default IP address
10.90.90.91
10.90.90.92
10.90.90.94
10.90.90.97
IP address assigned by MM
192.168.70.127
192.168.70.128
192.168.70.129
192.168.70.130
N OTE – Switch Modules installed in Bay 1 and Bay 2 connect to server NICs 1 and 2, respectively. However, Windows operating systems show that Switch Modules installed in Bay 3 and
Bay 4 connect to server NICs 4 and 3, respectively.
Default Gateway
The default Gateway IP address determines where packets with a destination address outside the current subnet should be sent. Usually, the default Gateway is a router or host acting as an
IP gateway to handle connections to other subnets of other TCP/IP networks. If you want to access the GbE Switch Module from outside your local network, use the management module to assign a default Gateway address to the GbE Switch Module. Choose I/O Module Tasks >
Configuration from the navigation pane on the left, and enter the default Gateway IP address
(for example, 192.168.70.125). Click Save.
Configuring management module for switch access
Complete the following initial configuration steps:
1.
Connect the Ethernet port of the management module to a 10/100 Mbps network (with access to a management station) or directly to a management station.
2.
Access and log on to the management module, as described in the BladeCenter Manage-
ment Module User’s Guide. The management module provides the appropriate IP addresses for network access (see the applicable BladeCenter Installation and User’s
Guide publications for more information).
3.
Select Configuration on the I/O Module Tasks menu on the left side of the BladeCenter
Management Module window. See
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 21
Alteon OS Command Reference
Figure 1-1 Switch management on the BladeCenter management module
4.
You can use the default IP addresses provided by the management module, or you can assign a new IP address to the switch module through the management module. You can assign this IP address through one of the following methods:
Manually through the BladeCenter management module
Automatically through the IBM Director Configuration Wizard (available in
Director release 4.21)
N OTE – If you change the IP address of the GbE Switch Module, make sure that the switch module and the management module both reside on the same subnet.
22 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
5.
Enable the following features in the management module:
External Ports (I/O Module Tasks > Admin/Power/Restart > Advance Setup)
External management over all ports (Configuration > Advanced Configuration)
This setting is required if you want to access the management network through the external ports on the GbE Switch Module.
The default value is Disabled for both features. If these features are not already enabled, change the value to Enabled, then Save.
N OTE – In Advanced Configuration > Advanced Setup, enable “Preserve new IP configuration on all switch resets,” to retain the switch’s IP interface when you restore factory defaults.
This setting preserves the management port’s IP address in the management module’s memory, so you maintain connectivity to the management module after a reset.
You can now start a Telnet session, Browser-Based Interface (Web) session, a Secure Shell session, or a secure HTTPS session to the GbE Switch Module.
Connecting to the Switch via Telnet
Use the management module to access the GbE Switch Module through Telnet. Choose
I/O Module Tasks > Configuration from the navigation pane on the left. Select a bay number and click Advanced Configuration > Start Telnet/Web Session > Start Telnet Session. A
Telnet window opens a connection to the Switch Module (requires Java 1.4 Plug-in).
Once that you have configured the GbE Switch Module with an IP address and gateway, you can access the switch from any workstation connected to the management network. Telnet access provides the same options for user and administrator access as those available through the management module, minus certain Telnet and management commands.
To establish a Telnet connection with the switch, run the Telnet program on your workstation and issue the Telnet command, followed by the switch IP address:
telnet <switch IP address>
Running Telnet
Once the IP parameters on the GbE Switch Module are configured, you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection. From the management module, you can establish a Telnet connection with the switch.
You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained on
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 23
Alteon OS Command Reference
Establishing an SSH Connection
Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of a GbE Switch Module via Telnet, this method does not provide a secure connection. The SSH (Secure Shell) protocol enables you to securely log into another computer over a network to execute commands remotely. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration, SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure.
The switch can do only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. Thus, a SSH/SCP client will not be able to login if the switch is doing key generation at that time or if another client has just logged in before this client. Similarly, the system will fail to do the key generation if a
SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time.
The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below.
Server Host Authentication: Client RSA-authenticates the switch in the beginning of every connection.
Key Exchange: RSA
Encryption: 3DES-CBC, DES
User Authentication: Local password authentication, Radius
The following SSH clients have been tested:
SSH 1.2.23 and SSH 1.2.27 for Linux (freeware)
SecureCRT 3.0.2 and SecureCRT 3.0.3 (Van Dyke Technologies, Inc.)
F-Secure SSH 1.1 for Windows (Data Fellows)
N OTE – The Alteon OS implementation of SSH is based on SSH version 1.5 and supports SSH-
1.5-1.X.XX. SSH clients of other versions (especially Version 2) are not supported.
24 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Running SSH
Once the IP parameters are configured and the SSH service is turned on the GbE Switch Module , you can access the command line interface using an SSH connection. The default setting for
SSH access is disabled.
To establish an SSH connection with the switch, run the SSH program on your workstation by issuing the SSH command, followed by the switch IP address:
>> # ssh <switch IP address> or, if SecurID authentication is required, use the following command:
>> # ssh -1 ace <switch IP address>
You will then be prompted to enter your user name and password.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 25
Alteon OS Command Reference
Accessing the Switch
To enable better switch management and user accountability, three levels or classes of user access have been implemented on the GbE Switch Module . Levels of access to CLI, Web management functions, and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks. Conceptually, access classes are defined as follows:
User interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed on the
GbE Switch Module . Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications, such as switch statistics and current operational state information.
Operators can only effect temporary changes on the GbE Switch Module . These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch, operators cannot severely impact switch operation.
Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the switch configuration—changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch. Administrators can access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the GbE Switch Module .
Because administrators can also make temporary (operator-level) changes as well, they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes.
Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and passwords.
Once you are connected to the switch via local Telnet, remote Telnet, or SSH, you are prompted to enter a password. The default user names/password for each access level are listed in the following table.
26 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
N OTE – It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies. For more information, see
“Setting Passwords” on page 43
.
Table 1-2 User Access Levels
User Account Description and Tasks Performed Password
User The User has no direct responsibility for switch management.
He or she can view all switch status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch.
user
Operator The Operator manages all functions of the switch. The
Operator can reset ports, except the management ports. oper
Administrator
The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands on the GbE Switch
Module, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords.
admin
N OTE – With the exception of the “admin” user, access to each user level can be disabled by setting the password to an empty value.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 27
Alteon OS Command Reference
Setup Versus CLI
Once the administrator password is verified, you are given complete access to the switch. If the switch is still set to its factory default configuration, the system will ask whether you wish to run Setup (see
Chapter 2, “First-Time Configuration ”), a utility designed to help you through
the first-time configuration process. If the switch has already been configured, the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed instead.
The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges.
[Main Menu]
info - Information Menu
stats - Statistics Menu
cfg - Configuration Menu
oper - Operations Command Menu
boot - Boot Options Menu
maint - Maintenance Menu
diff - Show pending config changes [global command]
apply - Apply pending config changes [global command]
save - Save updated config to FLASH [global command]
revert - Revert pending or applied changes [global command]
exit - Exit [global command, always available]
N OTE – If you are accessing a user account, some menu options will not be available.
28 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Command Line History and Editing
For a description of global commands, shortcuts, and command line editing functions, see
Idle Timeout
By default, the switch will disconnect your Telnet session after five minutes of inactivity. This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter, which can be set from 1 to 60 minutes. For information on changing this parameter, see
“System Configuration” on page 174 .
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 29
Alteon OS Command Reference
30 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
C HAPTER 2
First-Time Configuration
To help with the initial process of configuring your switch, the Alteon OS software includes a
Setup utility. The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to enter all the necessary information for basic configuration of the switch. This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and how to change system passwords. Before you run Setup, you must first connect to the switch
(see
Chapter 1, “Connecting to the Switch ”).
31
Alteon OS Command Reference
Using the Setup Utility
Whenever you log in as the system administrator under the factory default configuration, you are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility. Setup can also be activated manually from the command line interface any time after login.
Information Needed For Setup
Setup requests the following information:
Basic system information
Date & time
Whether to use Spanning Tree Group or not
Optional configuration for each port
Speed, duplex, flow control, and negotiation mode (as appropriate)
Whether to use VLAN tagging or not (as appropriate)
Optional configuration for each VLAN
Name of VLAN
Which ports are included in the VLAN
Optional configuration of IP parameters
IP address, subnet mask, and VLAN for each IP interface
IP addresses for default gateway
Destination, subnet mask, and gateway IP address for each IP static route
Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not
Whether the RIP supply is enabled or not
Starting Setup When You Log In
The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under the factory default settings.
1.
Connect to the switch.
After connecting, the login prompt will appear as shown below.
Enter Password:
32 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
2.
Enter admin as the default administrator password.
If the factory default configuration is detected, the system prompts:
Nortel Layer2-3 GbE Switch Module
18:44:05 Wed Jan 3, 2007
The switch is booted with factory default configuration.
To ease the configuration of the switch, a "Set Up" facility which will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to the operation of the switch is provided.
Would you like to run "Set Up" to configure the switch? [y/n]:
N OTE – If the default admin login is unsuccessful, or if the administrator Main Menu appears instead, the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings.
3.
Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch, or n to bypass the Setup facility.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 33
Alteon OS Command Reference
Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually
Stopping Setup
To abort the Setup utility, press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question. When you abort Setup, the system will prompt:
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]
Enter n to abort Setup, or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning.
Restarting Setup
You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at the administrator prompt:
# /cfg/setup
Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration
When Setup is started, the system prompts:
"Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of
System Date and Time, Spanning Tree, Port Speed/Mode,
VLANs, and IP interfaces. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"]
------------------------------------------------------------
Will you be configuring VLANs? [y/n]
1.
Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. Otherwise enter n .
If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session, you can configure them later using the configuration menus, or by restarting the Setup facility. For more information on configuring VLANs, see the Alteon OS Application Guide.
Next, the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information.
2.
Enter the year of the current date at the prompt:
Enter year [2007]:
Enter the last two digits of the year as a number from 00 to 99. “00” is considered 2000. To keep the current year, press <Enter>.
34 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
N OTE – When the GbE Switch Module is reset, the date and time to revert to default values.
Use /cfg/sys/date and /cfg/sys/time to re-enter the current date and time.
The system displays the date and time settings:
System clock set to 18:55:36 Wed Jan 3, 2007.
3.
Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt:
System Date:
Enter month [1]:
Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. To keep the current month, press <Enter>.
4.
Enter the day of the current date at the prompt:
Enter day [3]:
Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. To keep the current day, press <Enter>.
5.
Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt:
System Time:
Enter hour in 24-hour format [18]:
Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23. To keep the current hour, press <Enter>.
6.
Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt:
Enter minutes [55]:
Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current minute, press <Enter>.
7.
Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt:
Enter seconds [37]:
Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current second, press <Enter>.
The system displays the date and time settings:
System clock set to 8:55:36 Wed Jan 3, 2007.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 35
Alteon OS Command Reference
8.
Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt:
Spanning Tree:
Current Spanning Tree Group 1 setting: ON
Turn Spanning Tree Group 1 OFF? [y/n]
Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree, or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on.
Setup Part 2: Port Configuration
N OTE – When configuring port options for your switch, some of the prompts and options may be different.
1.
Select the port to configure, or skip port configuration at the prompt:
Port Config:
Enter port (INT1-14, MGT1-2, EXT1-6):
N
OTE
– The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.
If you wish to change settings for individual ports, enter the number of the port you wish to configure. To skip port configuration, press <Enter> without specifying any port and go to
“Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 38 .
2.
Configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters.
If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector, the system prompts:
Gig Link Configuration:
Port Flow Control:
Current Port EXT1 flow control setting: both
Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]:
Enter rx to enable receive flow control, tx for transmit flow control, both to enable both, or none to turn flow control off for the port. To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.
36 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
3.
Configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode.
If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector, the system prompts:
Port Auto Negotiation:
Current Port EXT1 autonegotiation: on
Enter new value ["on"/"off"]:
Enter on to enable port autonegotiation, off to disable it, or press <Enter> to keep the current setting.
4.
If configuring VLANs, enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port.
If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1, the system prompts:
Port VLAN tagging config (tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs)
Current TAG support: disabled
Enter new TAG support [d/e]:
Enter d to disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter e to enable VLAN tagging for the port.
To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.
5.
The system prompts you to configure the next port:
Enter port (INT1-14, MGT1-2, EXT1-6):
When you are through configuring ports, press <Enter> without specifying any port. Otherwise, repeat the steps in this section.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 37
Alteon OS Command Reference
Setup Part 3: VLANs
1.
Select the VLAN to configure, or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt:
VLAN Config:
Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4094, NULL at end:
If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs, enter the number of the VLAN you wish to configure. To skip VLAN configuration, press <Enter> without typing a VLAN number and
go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 39
.
2.
Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt:
Current VLAN name: VLAN 2
Enter new VLAN name:
Entering a new VLAN name is optional. To use the pending new VLAN name, press <Enter>.
3.
Enter the VLAN port numbers:
Define Ports in VLAN:
Current VLAN 2: empty
Enter ports one per line, NULL at end:
Enter each port, by port number or port alias, and confirm placement of the port into this
VLAN. When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN, press <Enter> without specifying any port.
4.
Configure Spanning Tree Group membership for the VLAN:
Spanning Tree Group membership:
Current Spanning Tree Group index: 1
Enter new Spanning Tree Group index [1-127]:
5.
The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN:
VLAN Config:
Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4094, NULL at end:
Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured. When all VLANs have been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN.
38 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Setup Part 4: IP Configuration
The system prompts for IP parameters.
IP Interfaces
IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs.
Up to 128 IP interfaces can be configured on the GbE Switch Module . The IP address assigned to each IP interface provide the switch with an IP presence on your network. No two IP interfaces can be on the same IP subnet. The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for remote configuration, and for routing between subnets and VLANs (if used).
1.
Select the IP interface to configure, or skip interface configuration at the prompt:
IP Config:
IP interfaces:
Enter interface number: (1-128)
If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces, enter the number of the IP interface you with to configure. To skip IP interface configuration, press <Enter> without typing an interface
number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 40 .
N OTE – Interface 128 is reserved for switch management. If you change the IP address of
IF 128, you can lose the connection to the management module. Use the management module to change the IP address of the GbE Switch Module.
2.
For the specified IP interface, enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation:
Current IP address: 0.0.0.0
Enter new IP address:
To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.
3.
At the prompt, enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation:
Current subnet mask: 0.0.0.0
Enter new subnet mask:
To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 39
Alteon OS Command Reference
4.
If configuring VLANs, specify a VLAN for the interface.
This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1:
Current VLAN: 1
Enter new VLAN [1-4090]:
Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs, or press <Enter> without specifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting.
5.
At the prompt, enter y to enable the IP interface, or n to leave it disabled:
Enable IP interface? [y/n]
6.
The system prompts you to configure another interface:
Enter interface number: (1-128)
Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured. When all interfaces have been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any interface number.
Default Gateways
1.
At the prompt, select a default gateway for configuration, or skip default gateway configuration:
IP default gateways:
Enter default gateway number: (1-132)
Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured. To skip default gateway configura-
tion, press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to “IP Routing” on page 41 .
2.
At the prompt, enter the IP address for the selected default gateway:
Current IP address: 0.0.0.0
Enter new IP address:
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation, or press <Enter> without specifying an address to accept the current setting.
3.
At the prompt, enter y to enable the default gateway, or n to leave it disabled:
Enable default gateway? [y/n]
40 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
4.
The system prompts you to configure another default gateway:
Enter default gateway number: (1-132)
Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured. When all default gateways have been configured, press <Enter> without specifying any number.
IP Routing
When IP interfaces are configured for the various subnets attached to your switch, IP routing between them can be performed entirely within the switch. This eliminates the need to send inter-subnet communication to an external router device. Routing on more complex networks, where subnets may not have a direct presence on the GbE Switch Module , can be accomplished through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically.
This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters.
1.
At the prompt, enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing:
Enable IP forwarding? [y/n]
Enter y to enable IP forwarding. To disable IP forwarding, enter n .To keep the current setting, press <Enter>.
Setup Part 5: Final Steps
1.
When prompted, decide whether to restart Setup or continue:
Would you like to run from top again? [y/n]
Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning, or n to continue.
2.
When prompted, decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes:
Review the changes made? [y/n]
Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. Enter n to continue without reviewing the changes. We recommend that you review the changes.
3.
Next, decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt:
Apply the changes? [y/n]
Enter y to apply the changes, or n to continue without applying. Changes are normally applied.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 41
Alteon OS Command Reference
4.
At the prompt, decide whether to make the changes permanent:
Save changes to flash? [y/n]
Enter y to save the changes to flash. Enter n to continue without saving the changes. Changes are normally saved at this point.
5.
If you do not apply or save the changes, the system prompts whether to abort them:
Abort all changes? [y/n]
Enter y to discard the changes. Enter n to return to the “Apply the changes?” prompt.
N OTE – After initial configuration is complete, it is recommended that you change the default passwords as shown in
“Setting Passwords” on page 43
.
Optional Setup for Telnet Support
N OTE – This step is optional. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to the GbE Switch Module through a remote Telnet connection.
1.
Telnet is enabled by default. To change the setting, use the following command:
>> # /cfg/sys/access/tnet
2.
Apply and save SNMP and /or telnet configuration(s).
>> System# apply
>> System# save
42 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Setting Passwords
It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies.
To change the administrator password, you must login using the administrator password.
N OTE – If you forget your administrator password, call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode.
Changing the Default Administrator Password
The administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords.
The default password for the administrator account is admin. To change the default password, follow this procedure:
1.
Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password.
2.
From the Main Menu, use the following command to access the Configuration Menu:
Main# /cfg
The Configuration Menu is displayed.
[Configuration Menu]
sys - System-wide Parameter Menu
port - Port Menu
l2 - Layer 2 Menu
l3 - Layer 3 Menu
qos - QOS Menu
acl - Access Control List Menu
pmirr - Port Mirroring Menu
setup - Step by step configuration set up
dump - Dump current configuration to script file
ptcfg - Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server
gtcfg - Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server
cur - Display current configuration
3.
From the Configuration Menu, use the following command to select the System Menu:
>> Configuration# sys
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 43
Alteon OS Command Reference
The System Menu is displayed.
[System Menu]
syslog - Syslog Menu
sshd - SSH Server Menu
radius - RADIUS Authentication Menu
tacacs+ - TACACS+ Authentication Menu
ldap - LDAP Authentication Menu
ntp - NTP Server Menu
ssnmp - System SNMP Menu
access - System Access Menu
date - Set system date
time - Set system time
timezone - Set system timezone (daylight savings)
olddst - Set system DST for US
idle - Set timeout for idle CLI sessions
notice - Set login notice
bannr - Set login banner
hprompt - Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt
reminders - Enable/disable Reminders
cur - Display current system-wide parameters
4.
From the System Menu, use the following command to select the System Access Menu:
>> System# access
The System Access Menu is displayed.
[System Access Menu]
mgmt - Management Network Definition Menu
user - User Access Control Menu (passwords)
http - Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access
https - HTTPS Web Access Menu
wport - Set HTTP (Web) server port number
snmp - Set SNMP access control
userbbi - Enable/disable user configuration from BBI
tnport - Set Telnet server port number
tport - Set the TFTP Port for the system
cur - Display current system access configuration
5.
Select the administrator password.
System Access# user/admpw
44 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
6.
Enter the current administrator password at the prompt:
Changing ADMINISTRATOR password; validation required...
Enter current administrator password:
N OTE – If you forget your administrator password, call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode.
7.
Enter the new administrator password at the prompt:
Enter new administrator password:
8.
Enter the new administrator password, again, at the prompt:
Re-enter new administrator password:
9.
Apply and save your change by entering the following commands:
System# apply
System# save
Changing the Default User Password
The user login has limited control of the switch. Through a user account, you can view switch information and statistics, but you can’t make configuration changes.
The default password for the user account is user. This password can be changed from the user account. The administrator can change all passwords, as shown in the following procedure.
1.
Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password.
2.
From the Main Menu, use the following command to access the Configuration Menu:
Main# cfg
3.
From the Configuration Menu, use the following command to select the System Menu:
>> Configuration# sys
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 45
Alteon OS Command Reference
4.
From the System Menu, use the following command to select the System Access Menu:
>> System# access
5.
Select the user password.
System# user/usrpw
6.
Enter the current administrator password at the prompt.
Only the administrator can change the user password. Entering the administrator password confirms your authority.
Changing USER password; validation required...
Enter current administrator password:
7.
Enter the new user password at the prompt:
Enter new user password:
8.
Enter the new user password, again, at the prompt:
Re-enter new user password:
9.
Apply and save your changes:
System# apply
System# save
46 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
C HAPTER 3
Menu Basics
The GbE Switch Module’s Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for viewing switch information and statistics. In addition, the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of switch configuration.
To make the CLI easy to use, the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of menus and sub-menus. Each menu displays a list of commands and/or sub-menus that are available, along with a summary of what each command will do. Below each menu is a prompt where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu.
This chapter describes the Main Menu commands, and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI.
47
Alteon OS Command Reference
The Main Menu
The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login. The following table shows the Main Menu for the administrator login. Some features are not available under the user login.
[Main Menu]
info - Information Menu
stats - Statistics Menu
cfg - Configuration Menu
oper - Operations Command Menu
boot - Boot Options Menu
maint - Maintenance Menu
diff - Show pending config changes [global command]
apply - Apply pending config changes [global command]
save - Save updated config to FLASH [global command]
revert - Revert pending or applied changes [global command]
exit - Exit [global command, always available]
48 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Menu Summary
Information Menu
Provides sub-menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch: from basic system settings to VLANs, and more.
Statistics Menu
Provides sub-menus for displaying switch performance statistics. Included are port, IF, IP,
ICMP, TCP, UDP, SNMP, routing, ARP, DNS, and VRRP statistics.
Configuration Menu
This menu is available only from an administrator login. It includes sub-menus for configuring every aspect of the switch. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied. Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory.
Operations Command Menu
Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service, performing port mirroring, and enabling or disabling Server Load Balancing functions. It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages.
Boot Options Menu
This menu is used for upgrading switch software, selecting configuration blocks, and for resetting the switch when necessary.
Maintenance Menu
This menu is used for debugging purposes, enabling you to generate a dump of the critical state information in the switch, and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the
ARP and routing tables.
Chapter 3: Menu Basics 49
Alteon OS Command Reference
Global Commands
Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. These commands are useful for obtaining online help, navigating through menus, and for applying and saving configuration changes.
For help on a specific command, type help. You will see the following screen:
Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu] help up print pwd lines verbose exit quit diff apply save revert revert apply ping traceroute telnet history pushd popd who chpass_p chpass_s
The following are used to navigate the menu structure:
. Print current menu
.. Move up one menu level
/ Top menu if first, or command separator
! Execute command from history
Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands
Command
? command or help
. or print
.. or up
/ lines diff apply save
Action
Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu.
When used without the command parameter, a summary of the global commands is displayed.
Display the current menu.
Go up one level in the menu structure.
If placed at the beginning of a command, go to the Main Menu. Otherwise, this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line.
Set the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time. The default is 24 lines. When used without a value, the current setting is displayed. Set lines to a value of 0 (zero) to disable pagination.
Show any pending configuration changes.
Apply pending configuration changes.
Write configuration changes to non-volatile flash memory.
50 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands
Command revert revert apply exit or quit ping
Action
Remove pending configuration changes between “apply” commands. Use this command to remove any configuration changes made since last apply.
Remove pending or applied configuration changes between “save” commands. Use this command to remove any configuration changes made since last save.
Exit from the command line interface and log out.
Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. The format is as follows:
ping <host name>|<IP address> [tries (1-32)> [msec delay]] traceroute pwd verbose n telnet history pushd popd who chpass_p
Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device, tries (optional) is the number of attempts (1-32), msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between attempts. Configure the DNS parameters if specifying hostnames (see
“Domain Name System Configuration” on page 295
).
Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network. The format is as follows: traceroute <host name>| <IP address> [<max-hops (1-32)>
[msec delay]]
Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station, max-
hops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-16 devices), and delay
(optional) is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response. As with ping , the DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames.
Display the command path used to reach the current menu.
Sets the level of information displayed on the screen:
0 =Quiet: Nothing appears except errors—not even prompts.
1 =Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown, but no menus.
2 =Verbose: Everything is shown.
When used without a value, the current setting is displayed.
This command is used to telnet out of the switch. The format is as follows: telnet <host name>| <IP address> [port]
This command displays the most recent commands.
Save the current menu path, so you can jump back to it using popd.
Go to the menu path and position previously saved by using pushd.
Displays a list of users that are logged on to the switch.
Configures the password for the primary TACACS+ server.
Chapter 3: Menu Basics 51
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands
Command chpass_s
Action
Configures the password for the secondary TACACS+ server.
52 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Command Line History and Editing
Using the command line interface, you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with just a few keystrokes. The following options are available globally at the command line:
Table 3-2 Command Line History and Editing Options
Option history
!!
!
n
<Ctrl-p>
<Ctrl-n>
Description
Display a numbered list of the last 64 previously entered commands.
Repeat the last entered command.
Repeat the n th
command shown on the history list.
(Also the up arrow key.) Recall the previous command from the history list. This can be used multiple times to work backward through the last 64 commands. The recalled command can be entered as is, or edited using the options below.
(Also the down arrow key.) Recall the next command from the history list. This can be used multiple times to work forward through the last 64 commands. The recalled command can be entered as is, or edited using the options below.
<Ctrl-a>
<Ctrl-e>
<Ctrl-b>
<Ctrl-f>
Move the cursor to the beginning of command line.
Move cursor to the end of the command line.
(Also the left arrow key.) Move the cursor back one position to the left.
(Also the right arrow key.) Move the cursor forward one position to the right.
<Backspace> (Also the Delete key.) Erase one character to the left of the cursor position.
<Ctrl-d> Delete one character at the cursor position.
<Ctrl-k>
<Ctrl-l>
Kill (erase) all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line.
Redraw the screen.
<Ctrl-u>
Other keys
Clear the entire line.
Insert new characters at the cursor position.
Chapter 3: Menu Basics 53
Alteon OS Command Reference
Command Line Interface Shortcuts
Command Stacking
As a shortcut, you can type multiple commands on a single line, separated by forward slashes
(/). You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want.
For example, the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from the Main# prompt is as follows:
Main# cfg/l2/stg 1/port
Command Abbreviation
Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the command from the others in the same menu or sub-menu. For example, the command shown above could also be entered as follows:
Main# c/l2/stg 1/po
Tab Completion
By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and hitting <Tab>, the CLI will display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter. Entering additional letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed. If only one command fits the input text when <Tab> is pressed, that command will be supplied on the command line, waiting to be entered. If the <Tab> key is pressed without any input on the command line, the currently active menu will be displayed.
54 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 40M2420, April 2007
C HAPTER 4
The Information Menu
You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command modes. This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch information.
40M2420, April 2007 55
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info
Information Menu
[Information Menu]
sys - System Information Menu
l2 - Layer 2 Information Menu
l3 - Layer 3 Information Menu
qos - QoS Menu
acl - Show ACL information
link - Show link status
port - Show port information
geaport - Show system port and gea port mapping
sfp - Show External Port SFP/XFP status
dump - Dump all information
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in
, with pointers to detailed information.
Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info)
Command Syntax and Usage sys
Displays the System Information Menu. For details, see page 58
.
l2
Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu. For details, see
.
l3
Displays the Layer 3 Information Menu. For details, see
.
qos
Displays the Quality of Service (QoS) Information Menu. For details, see
.
acl
Displays the current configuration profile for each Access Control List (ACL) and ACL Group.
For details, see
.
link
Displays configuration information about each port, including:
Port alias
Port speed
Duplex mode (half, full, or auto)
Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or auto)
Link status (up or down)
For details, see
.
56 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info)
Command Syntax and Usage port
Displays port status information, including:
Port alias
Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not
Port VLAN ID (PVID)
Port name
VLAN membership
Port Fast Fowarding status
FDB Learning status
For details, see
.
geaport
Displays the GbESM port mapping between the two Gigabit Ethernet Aggregators (GEA).
For details, see
.
sfp
Displays the status of the Small Form Pluggable (SFP) module on each Fiber External Port.
For details, see
. dump
Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more, depending on your configuration).
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 57
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/sys
System Information
[System Menu]
snmpv3 - SNMPv3 Information Menu
chassis - Show BladeCenter Chassis related information
general - Show general system information
log - Show last 100 syslog messages
user - Show current user status
e2eshow - Show E2E status
dump - Dump all system information
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in
, with pointers to where detailed information can be found.
Table 4-2 System Menu Options (/info/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3
Displays SNMPv3 Information Menu. To view the menu options, see page 59 .
chassis
Displays information about the BladeCenter chassis. For details, see page 69
.
general
Displays system information, including:
System date and time
Switch model name and number
Switch name and location
Time of last boot
MAC address of the switch management processor
IP address of the management interface
Hardware version and part number
Software image file and version number
Configuration name
Log-in banner, if one is configured
For details, see
log
Displays most recent syslog messages. For details, see
user
Displays configured user names and their status. For details, see page 73
.
e2eshow
Displays End-to-End Flow Control information.
58 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 4-2 System Menu Options (/info/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage dump
Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more, depending on your configuration).
/info/sys/snmpv3
SNMPv3 System Information Menu
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2
Framework by supporting the following:
a new SNMP message format
security for messages
access control
remote configuration of SNMP parameters
For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276.
[SNMPv3 Information Menu]
usm - Show usmUser table information
view - Show vacmViewTreeFamily table information
access - Show vacmAccess table information
group - Show vacmSecurityToGroup table information
comm - Show community table information
taddr - Show targetAddr table information
tparam - Show targetParams table information
notify - Show notify table information
dump - Show all SNMPv3 information
Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3)
Command Syntax and Usage usm
Displays User Security Model (USM) table information. To view the table, see page 61
.
view
Displays information about view, sub-trees, mask and type of view. To view a sample, see page 62 .
access
Displays View-based Access Control information. To view a sample, see
.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 59
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 4-3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options (/info/sys/snmpv3)
Command Syntax and Usage group
Displays information about the group that includes, the security model, user name, and group name. To view a sample, see
.
comm
Displays information about the community table information. To view a sample, see page 64 .
taddr
Displays the Target Address table information. To view a sample, see page 65
.
tparam
Displays the Target parameters table information. To view a sample, see page 66
.
notify
Displays the Notify table information. To view a sample, see
.
dump
Displays all the SNMPv3 information. To view a sample, see page 68
.
60 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/sys/snmpv3/usm
SNMPv3 USM User Table Information
The User-based Security Model (USM) in SNMPv3 provides security services such as authentication and privacy of messages. This security model makes use of a defined set of user identities displayed in the USM user table. The USM user table contains the following information:
the user name
a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Security Model
an authentication protocol, which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the user can be authenticated
the privacy protocol usmUser Table:
User Name Protocol
-------------------------------- -------------------------------adminmd5 HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY adminsha HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY v1v2only NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY
Table 4-4 USM User Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/usm)
Field
User Name
Protocol
Description
This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can use to access the switch.
This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are protected from disclosure using a privacy protocol. Alteon OS
21.0 supports DES algorithm for privacy. The software also supports two authentication algorithms: MD5 and HMAC-SHA.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 61
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/sys/snmpv3/view
SNMPv3 View Table Information
The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the management information in the management domain that the group can access within each context by specifying the group’s rights in terms of a particular MIB view for security reasons.
View Name Subtree Mask Type
----------------- ------------------ -------------- -------iso 1.3 included v1v2only 1.3 included v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.15 excluded v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.16 excluded v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.18 excluded
Table 4-5 SNMPv3 View Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/view)
Field Description
View Name
Subtree
Mask
Type
Displays the name of the view.
Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string. A view subtree is the set of all MIB object instances which have a common Object Identifier prefix to their names.
Displays the bit mask.
Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or excluded from the MIB view.
62 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/sys/snmpv3/access
SNMPv3 Access Table Information
The access control sub system provides authorization services.
The vacmAccessTable maps a group name, security information, a context, and a message type, which could be the read or write type of operation or notification into a MIB view.
The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of a group. This group's access rights are determined by a read-view, a write-view and a notify-view. The read-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group while reading the objects. The write-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when writing objects. The notify-view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when sending a notification.
Group Name Model Level ReadV WriteV NotifyV
---------- ------- ------------ ---------- ---------- ---------v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv iso iso v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv iso iso iso
Table 4-6 SNMPv3 Access Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/access)
Field Description
Group Name Displays the name of group.
Model
Level
ReadV
WriteV
NotifyV
Displays the security model used, for example, SNMPv1, or
SNMPv2 or USM.
Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of access. For example, noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv, or auth-
Priv.
Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read access.
Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write access.
Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify access.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 63
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/sys/snmpv3/group
SNMPv3 Group Table Information
A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights assigned to all the security names belonging to that group. The group is identified by a group name.
Sec Model User Name Group Name
---------- ------------------------------- -------------------snmpv1 v1v2only v1v2grp usm adminmd5 admingrp usm adminsha admingrp
Table 4-7 SNMPv3 Group Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/group)
Field
Sec Model
User Name
Group Name
Description
Displays the security model used, which is any one of: USM,
SNMPv1, SNMPv2, and SNMPv3.
Displays the name for the group.
Displays the access name of the group.
/info/sys/snmpv3/comm
SNMPv3 Community Table Information
This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP engine.
Index Name User Name Tag
---------- ---------- -------------------- ---------trap1 public v1v2only v1v2trap
Field
Table 4-8 SNMPv3 Community Table Parameters (/info/sys/snmpv3/comm)
Index
Name
User Name
Description
Displays the unique index value of a row in this table
Displays the community string, which represents the configuration.
Displays the User Security Model (USM) user name.
Tag Displays the community tag. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints from which a command responder application accepts management requests and to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap.
64 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/sys/snmpv3/taddr
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information
This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information, which is stored in the
SNMP engine.
Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params
---------- --------------- ---- ---------- --------------trap1 47.81.25.66 162 v1v2trap v1v2param
Field
Table 4-9 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information Parameters (/info/sys/ snmpv3/taddr)
Name
Transport Addr
Port
Taglist
Params
Description
Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetAddrEntry.
Displays the transport addresses.
Displays the SNMP UDP port number.
This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select target addresses for a particular SNMP message.
The value of this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable. The identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to this transport address.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 65
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/sys/snmpv3/tparam
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information
Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level
--------------- -------- -------------- --------- --------v1v2param snmpv2c v1v2only snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv
Field
Name
Table 4-10 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/ tparam)
MP Model
User Name
Sec Model
Sec Level
Description
Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargeParamsEntry.
Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating
SNMP messages using this entry.
Displays the securityName, which identifies the entry on whose behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry.
Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry. The system may choose to return an inconsistentValue error if an attempt is made to set this variable to a value for a security model which the system does not support.
Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP messages using this entry.
66 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/sys/snmpv3/notify
SNMPv3 Notify Table Information
Name Tag
-------------------- -------------------v1v2trap v1v2trap
Field
Name
Tag
Table 4-11 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information (/info/sys/snmpv3/notify)
Description
The locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this snmpNotifyEntry .
This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag value equal to the value of this entry, is selected. If this entry contains a value of zero length, no entries are selected.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 67
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/sys/snmpv3/dump
SNMPv3 Dump Information
usmUser Table:
User Name Protocol
-------------------------------- -------------------------------adminmd5 HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY adminsha HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY v1v2only NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY vacmAccess Table:
Group Name Model Level ReadV WriteV NotifyV
---------- ------- ------------ ---------- ---------- ---------v1v2grp snmpv1 noAuthNoPriv iso iso v1v2only admingrp usm authPriv iso iso iso vacmViewTreeFamily Table:
View Name Subtree Mask Type
-------------------- --------------- ------------ -------------iso 1.3 included v1v2only 1.3 included v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.15 excluded v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.16 excluded v1v2only 1.3.6.1.6.3.18 excluded vacmSecurityToGroup Table:
Sec Model User Name Group Name
---------- ------------------------------- ----------------------snmpv1 v1v2only v1v2grp usm adminmd5 admingrp usm adminsha admingrp snmpCommunity Table:
Index Name User Name Tag
---------- ---------- -------------------- ---------snmpNotify Table:
Name Tag
-------------------- -------------------snmpTargetAddr Table:
Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params
---------- --------------- ---- ---------- --------------snmpTargetParams Table:
Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level
-------------------- -------- ------------------ --------- -------
68 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
info/sys/chassis
BladeCenter Chassis Information
IBM BladeCenter Chassis Related Information:
Switch Module Bay = 1
Chassis Type = Enterprise
POST Results = 0xff
Management Module Control -
Default Configuration = FALSE
Skip Extended Memory Test = FALSE
Disable External Ports = FALSE
POST Diagnostics Control = Normal Diagnostics
Control Register = 0x19
Extended Control Register = 0x00
Management Module Status Reporting -
Device PowerUp Complete = TRUE
Over Current Fault = FALSE
Fault LED = OFF
Primary Temperature Warning = OK
Secondary Temperature Warning = OK
Status Register = 0x40
Extended Status Register = 0x01
Chassis information includes details about the BladeCenter chassis and management module settings.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 69
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/sys/general
General System Information
System Information at 0:16:42 Wed Jan 3, 2007
Time zone: No timezone configured
Nortel Layer 2-3 GbE Switch Module
Switch is up 5 days, 2 hours, 16 minutes and 42 seconds.
Last boot: 0:00:47 Wed Jan 3, 2007 (power cycle)
MAC address: 00:11:58:ad:a3:00 Management IP Address (if 128):
10.90.90.97
Software Version 1.3.0 (FLASH image1), factory default configuration.
PCBA Part Number: 317857-A
FAB Number: EL4512011
Serial Number: YJ1WDW47N277
Manufacturing Date:
Hardware Revision: 0
Board Revision: 2
PLD Firmware Version: 1.0
Temperature Sensor 1 (Warning): 33.0 C (Warn at 77.0 C/
Recover at 72.0 C)
Temperature Sensor 2 (Shutdown): 32.0 C (Warn at 90.0 C/
Recover at 80.0 C)
Switch is in I/O Module Bay 1
N OTE – The display of temperature will come up only if the temperature of any of the sensors exceeds the temperature threshold. There will be a warning from the software if any of the sensors exceeds this temperature threshold. The switch will shut down if the power supply overheats.
System information includes:
System date and time
Switch model
Switch name and location
Time of last boot
MAC address of the switch management processor
IP address of management IP interface
Hardware version and part number
70 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Software image file and version number
Configuration name
Log-in banner, if one is configured
Alteon OS Command Reference
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 71
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/sys/log
Show Recent Syslog Messages
Date Time Criticality level Message
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port INT1
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port INT8
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port INT7
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port INT2
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port INT1
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port INT4
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port INT3
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port INT6
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port INT5
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port EXT4
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port EXT1
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port EXT3
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port EXT2
Jul 8 17:25:41 NOTICE system: link up on port INT3
Jul 8 17:25:42 NOTICE system: link up on port INT2
Jul 8 17:25:42 NOTICE system: link up on port INT4
Jul 8 17:25:42 NOTICE system: link up on port INT3
Jul 8 17:25:42 NOTICE system: link up on port INT6
Jul 8 17:25:42 NOTICE system: link up on port INT5
Jul 8 17:25:42 NOTICE system: link up on port INT1
Jul 8 17:25:42 NOTICE system: link up on port INT6
Each syslog message has a criticality level associated with it, included in text form as a prefix to the log message. One of eight different prefixes is used, depending on the condition that the administrator is being notified of, as shown below.
EMERG : indicates the system is unusable
ALERT : Indicates action should be taken immediately
CRIT : Indicates critical conditions
ERR : indicates error conditions or errored operations
WARNING : indicates warning conditions
NOTICE : indicates a normal but significant condition
INFO : indicates an information message
DEBUG : indicates a debug-level message
72 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/sys/user
User Status
Usernames:
user - enabled - offline
oper - disabled - offline
admin - Always Enabled - online 1 session
Current User ID table:
1: name paul , dis, cos user , password valid, offline
Current strong password settings:
strong password status: disabled
This command displays the status of the configured usernames.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 73
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l2
Layer 2 Information
[Layer 2 Menu]
fdb - Forwarding Database Information Menu
lacp - Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu
8021x - Show 802.1x information
stg - Show STP information
cist - Show CIST information
trunk - Show Trunk Group information
vlan - Show VLAN information
gen - Show general information
dump - Dump all layer 2 information
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in
, with pointers to where detailed information can be found.
Table 4-12 Layer 2 Menu Options (/info/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage fdb
Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu. For details, see
.
lacp
Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu. For details, see page 78 .
8021x
Displays the 802.1x Information Menu. For details, see page 80 .
stg
In addition to seeing if STG is enabled or disabled, you can view the following STG bridge information:
Priority
Hello interval
Maximum age value
Forwarding delay
Aging time
You can also see the following port-specific STG information:
Port alias and priority
Cost
State
For details, see
74 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 4-12 Layer 2 Menu Options (/info/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage cist
Displays Common internal Spanning Tree (CIST) bridge information, including the following:
Priority
Hello interval
Maximum age value
Forwarding delay
You can also view port-specific CIST information, including the following:
Port number and priority
Cost
State
For details, see
trunk
When trunk groups are configured, you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups.
For details, see
vlan
Displays VLAN configuration information, including:
VLAN Number
VLAN Name
Status
Port membership of the VLAN
For details, see
gen
Displays general Layer 2 information. dump
Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 2 menu (10K or more, depending on your configuration).
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 75
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l2/fdb
FDB Information
[Forwarding Database Menu]
find - Show a single FDB entry by MAC address
port - Show FDB entries on a single port
trunk - Show FDB entries on a single trunk
vlan - Show FDB entries on a single VLAN
state - Show FDB entries by state
dump - Show all FDB entries
The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control
(MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned.
The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address.
N OTE – The master forwarding database supports up to 16K MAC address entries on the MP per switch.
Table 4-13 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb)
Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>]
Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. Enter the MAC address using the format, xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. For example,
08:00:20:12:34:56 .
You can also enter the MAC address using the format, xxxxxxxxxxxx.
For example, 080020123456.
port <port number or alias>
Displays all FDB entries for a particular port.
trunk <trunk number>
Displays all FDB entries for a particular trunk.
vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>
Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.
state unknown|forward|trunk
Displays all FDB entries of a particular state.
dump
Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. For more information, see
.
76 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l2/fdb/dump
Show All FDB Information
MAC address VLAN Port Trnk State
----------------- ---- ---- ---- -----
00:04:38:90:54:18 1 EXT4 FWD
00:09:6b:9b:01:5f 1 INT13 FWD
00:09:6b:ca:26:ef 4095 MGT1 FWD
00:0f:06:ec:3b:00 4095 MGT1 FWD
00:11:43:c4:79:83 1 EXT4 FWD
00:11:f9:36:71:00 4095 MGT1 FWD
00:13:0a:4d:3c:00 4095 MGT1 FWD
An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state, means that it has been learned by the switch.
When in the trunking (TRK) state, the port field represents the trunk group number. If the state for the port is listed as unknown (UNK), the MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch, but has only been seen as a destination address. When an address is in the unknown state, no outbound port is indicated, although ports which reference the address as a destination will be listed under “Reference ports.”
If the state for the port is listed as an interface (IF), the MAC address is for a standard VRRP virtual router.
Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database
To delete a MAC address from the forwarding database (FDB) or to clear the entire FDB, refer
to “Forwarding Database Maintenance” on page 343 .
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 77
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l2/lacp
Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information
[LACP Menu]
aggr - Show LACP aggregator information for the port
port - Show LACP port information
dump - Show all LACP ports information
Use these commands to display Link Aggregation Protocol (LACP) status information about each port on the GbE Switch Module.
Table 4-14 LACP Menu Options (/info/l2/lacp)
Command Syntax and Usage aggr
Displays detailed information of the LACP aggregator used by the selected port. port
Displays LACP information about the selected port. dump
Displays a summary of LACP information. For details, see page 78
.
/info/l2/lacp/dump
Show all LACP Information
port lacp adminkey operkey selected prio attached trunk
aggr
----------------------------------------------------------------
INT1 active 30 30 y 32768 17 19
INT2 active 30 30 y 32768 17 19
INT3 off 19 19 n 32768 -- --
INT4 off 20 20 n 32768 -- --
...
LACP dump includes the following information for each external port in the GbESM:
lacp
Displays the port’s LACP mode (active, passive, or off)
adminkey
Displays the value of the port’s adminkey.
operkey
Shows the value of the port’s operational key.
78 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
selected
Indicates whether the port has been selected to be part of a Link Aggregation Group.
prio
Shows the value of the port priority.
attached aggr
Displays the aggregator associated with each port.
trunk
This value represents the LACP trunk group number.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 79
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l2/8021x
802.1x Information
System capability : Authenticator
System status : disabled
Protocol version : 1
Authenticator Backend
Port Auth Mode Auth Status PAE State Auth State
----- ------------ ------------ -------------- ----------
INT1 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
*INT2 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
*INT3 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
*INT4 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
*INT5 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
*INT6 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
*INT7 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
*INT8 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
INT9 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
INT10 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
*INT11 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
*INT12 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
*INT13 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
*INT14 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
MGT1 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
*MGT2 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
EXT1 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
EXT2 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
*EXT3 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
EXT4 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
EXT5 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
EXT6 force-auth authorized initialize initialize
------------------------------------------------------------------
* - Port down or disabled
N OTE – The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.
80 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
The following table describes the IEEE 802.1x parameters.
Table 4-15 802.1x Parameter Descriptions (/info/l2/8021x)
Parameter
Port
Auth Mode
Auth Status
Authenticator
PAE State
Backend
Auth State
Description
Displays each port’s alias.
Displays the Access Control authorization mode for the port. The Authorization mode can be one of the following:
force-unauth auto
force-auth
Displays the current authorization status of the port, either authorized or unauthorized.
Displays the Authenticator Port Access Entity State. The PAE state can be one of the following:
initialize
disconnected connecting
authenticating authenticated
aborting held
forceAuth
Displays the Backend Authorization State. The Backend Authorization state can be one of the following:
initialize
request response
success fail
timeout idle
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 81
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l2/stg
Spanning Tree Information
-----------------------------------------------------------------upfast disabled, update 40
------------------------------------------------------------------
Spanning Tree Group 1: On (STP/PVST+)
VLANs: 1 10
Current Root: Path-Cost Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel
8000 00:16:60:f9:1e:00 0 (null) 2 20 15
Parameters: Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging
32768 2 20 15 300
Port Priority Cost FastFwd State Designated Bridge Des Port
---- -------- ---- -------- ------- --------------------- --------
INT1 0 0 n FORWARDING *
INT2 0 0 n FORWARDING *
INT3 0 0 n FORWARDING *
INT4 0 0 n FORWARDING *
INT5 0 0 n FORWARDING *
INT6 0 0 n FORWARDING *
INT7 0 0 n FORWARDING *
INT8 0 0 n FORWARDING *
INT9 0 0 n DISABLED *
INT10 0 0 n FORWARDING *
INT11 0 0 n FORWARDING *
INT12 0 0 n FORWARDING *
INT13 0 0 n FORWARDING *
INT14 0 0 n FORWARDING *
EXT1 128 2 n DISABLED
EXT2 128 2 n DISABLED
EXT3 128 2 n FORWARDING 8000-00:16:60:f9:1e:00 8013
EXT4 128 4! n FORWARDING 8000-00:16:60:f9:1e:00 8014
EXT5 128 2 n DISABLED
EXT6 128 2 n DISABLED
* = STP turned off for this port.
! = Automatic path cost.
N OTE – The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.
82 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
The switch software uses the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). In addition to seeing if STG is enabled or disabled, you can view the following STG bridge information:
Priority
Hello interval
Maximum age value
Forwarding delay
Aging time
You can also see the following port-specific STG information:
Slot number
Port alias and priority
Cost
State
The following table describes the STG parameters.
Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Priority (bridge)
Hello
MaxAge
FwdDel
Aging priority (port)
Description
The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STG root bridge.
The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value.
The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STG network.
The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state.
The aging time parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database.
The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 83
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 4-16 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions (Continued)
Parameter
Cost
State
Description
The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated.
The state field shows the current state of the port. The state field can be either
BLOCKING , LISTENING, LEARNING, FORWARDING, or DISABLED.
Designated
Bridge
The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to each port, if applicable. Information includes the priority (hex) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge.
Designated Port The identifier of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected.
84 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l2/stg
RSTP/MSTP Information
Spanning Tree Group 1: On (RSTP)
VLANs: 1
Current Root: Path-Cost Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel
8000 00:11:58:ae:39:00 0 EXT4 2 20 15
Parameters: Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging
32768 2 20 15 300
Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Type
----- ---- --------- ----- ---- ---------------------- -------- -----
INT1 0 0 DSB *
INT2 0 0 DSB *
INT3 0 0 FWD *
INT4 0 0 DSB *
INT5 0 0 DSB *
INT6 0 0 DSB *
INT7 0 0 DSB *
INT8 0 0 DSB *
INT9 0 0 DSB *
INT10 0 0 DSB *
INT11 0 0 DSB *
INT12 0 0 DSB *
INT13 0 0 DSB *
INT14 0 0 DSB *
EXT1 128 2000 FWD DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00 8011 P2P
EXT2 128 2000 DISC BKUP 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00 8011 P2P
EXT3 128 2000 FWD DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00 8013 P2P
EXT4 128 20000 DISC BKUP 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00 8013 Shared
EXT5 128 2000 FWD DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00 8011 P2P
EXT6 128 2000 FWD DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00 8011 P2P
* = STP turned off for this port.
N OTE – The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.
The switch software can be set to use the IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) or the IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).
If RSTP/MSTP is turned on (see
), you can view RSTP/MSTP bridge information for the Spanning Tree Group, including the following:
Priority
Hello interval
Maximum age value
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 85
Alteon OS Command Reference
Forwarding delay
Aging time
You can view port-specific RSTP information, including the following:
Port number and priority
Cost
State
The following table describes the STP parameters in RSTP or MSTP mode.
Table 4-17 RSTP/MSTP Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Current Root
Priority (bridge)
Hello
MaxAge
FwdDel
Aging
Prio (port)
Cost
State
Description
The Current Root shows information about the root bridge for the Spanning
Tree. Information includes the priority (hex) and MAC address of the root.
The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge.
The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value.
The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigures the STP network.
The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state.
The aging time parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database.
The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment.
The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated.
The State field shows the current state of the port. The State field in RSTP or
MSTP mode can be one of the following: Discarding (DISC),
Learning (LRN) , Forwarding (FWD), or Disabled (DSB).
86 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 4-17 RSTP/MSTP Parameter Descriptions (Continued)
Parameter
Role
Description
The Role field shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree. The port role can be one of the following: Designated (DESG), Root (ROOT),
Alternate (ALTN), Backup (BKUP), Disabled (DSB), Master (MAST), or
Unknown (UNK).
Designated
Bridge
The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to each port, if applicable. Information includes the priority (hex) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge.
Designated Port The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected.
Type Type of link connected to the port, and whether the port is an edge port.
Link type values are AUTO, P2P, or SHARED.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 87
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l2/cist
Common Internal Spanning Tree Information
Common Internal Spanning Tree:
VLANs: 2-4094
Current Root: Path-Cost Port MaxAge FwdDel
8000 00:11:58:ae:39:00 0 0 20 15
Cist Regional Root: Path-Cost
8000 00:11:58:ae:39:00 0
Parameters: Priority MaxAge FwdDel Hops
32768 20 15 20
Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Hello Type
----- ---- --------- ----- ---- ---------------------- -------- ----- ----
INT1 0 0 DSB *
INT2 0 0 DSB *
INT3 0 0 FWD *
INT4 0 0 DSB *
INT5 0 0 DSB *
INT6 0 0 DSB *
INT7 0 0 DSB *
INT8 0 0 DSB *
INT9 0 0 DSB *
INT10 0 0 DSB *
INT11 0 0 DSB *
INT12 0 0 DSB *
INT13 0 0 DSB *
INT14 0 0 DSB *
MGT1 0 0 FWD *
MGT2 0 0 DSB *
EXT1 128 20000 FWD DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00 8011 2 P2P
EXT2 128 20000 DISC BKUP 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00 8011 2 P2P
EXT3 128 20000 FWD DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00 8013 2 P2P
EXT4 128 20000 DISC BKUP 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00 8013 2 Shared
EXT5 128 20000 FWD DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00 8011 2 P2P
EXT6 128 20000 FWD DESG 8000-00:11:58:ae:39:00 8011 2 P2P
* = STP turned off for this port.
N OTE – The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.
In addition to seeing if Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) is enabled or disabled, you can view CIST bridge information, including the following:
Priority
88 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Maximum age value
Forwarding delay
You can view port-specific CIST information, including the following:
Port number and priority
Cost
Link type and Port type
The following table describes the CIST parameters.
Table 4-18 CIST Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
CIST Root
CIST Regional Root
Priority (bridge)
Hello
MaxAge
FwdDel priority (port)
Cost
Description
The CIST Root shows information about the root bridge for the Common
Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). Values on this row of information refer to the
CIST root.
The CIST Regional Root shows information about the root bridge for this
MSTP region. Values on this row of information refer to the regional root.
The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge.
The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value.
The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STP network.
The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state.
The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment.
The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 89
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 4-18 CIST Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
State
Role
Designated
Bridge
Description
The state field shows the current state of the port. The state field can be either
Discarding (DISC), Learning (LRN) , or Forwarding
(FWD) .
The Role field shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree. The port role can be one of the following: Designated (DESG), Root (ROOT),
Alternate (ALTN), Backup (BKUP), Disabled (DSB), Master (MAST), or
Unknown (UNK).
The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to each port, if applicable. Information includes the priority (hex) and MAC address of the Designated Bridge.
Designated Port The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is connected.
Type Type of link connected to the port, and whether the port is an edge port.
Link type values are AUTO, P2P, or SHARED.
90 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l2/trunk
Trunk Group Information
Trunk group 1, port state:
EXT1: STG 1 forwarding
EXT2: STG 1 forwarding
When trunk groups are configured, you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups.
N OTE – If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding, the remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding.
/info/l2/vlan
VLAN Information
VLAN Name Status Ports
---- -------------------------------- ------ --------------------
1 Default VLAN ena INT1-INT14 EXT1-EXT6
10 VLAN 10 ena INT1
10 VLAN 10 ena EXT3
30 VLAN 30 ena EXT4
4095 Mgmt VLAN ena INT1-INT14 MGT1 MGT2
Private-VLAN Type Mapped-To Status Ports
------------ --------- ---------- ---------- -----------------
1000 primary 1001-1014 ena EXT1 EXT2
1001 isolated 1000 ena INT1
1002 community 1000 ena INT2
1003 community 1000 ena INT3
N OTE – The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.
This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state. Port membership is represented in slot/port format.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 91
Alteon OS Command Reference
VLAN information includes:
VLAN Number
VLAN Name
Status
Port membership of the VLAN
Protocol-based VLAN information
Whether the VLAN is a GVRP dynamic VLAN
Private VLAN configuration
92 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3
Layer 3 Information
[Layer 3 Menu]
route - IP Routing Information Menu
arp - ARP Information Menu
bgp - BGP Information Menu
ospf - OSPF Routing Information Menu
rip - RIP Routing Information Menu
ip - Show IP information
igmp - Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Group information
vrrp - Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information
dump - Dump all layer 3 information
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in
, with pointers to detailed information.
Table 4-19 Layer 3 Menu Options (/info/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage route
Displays the IP Routing Menu. Using the options of this menu, the system displays the following for each configured or learned route:
Route destination IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address
Type of route
Tag indicating origin of route
Metric for RIP tagged routes, specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15 hops, or 16 for infinite hops)
The IP interface that the route uses
For details, see
arp
Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu. For details, see page 98
.
bgp
Displays BGP Information Menu. To view menu options, see page 100 .
ospf
Displays OSPF routing Information Menu. For details, see page 102
.
rip
Displays Routing Information Protocol Menu. For details, see page 107
.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 93
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 4-19 Layer 3 Menu Options (/info/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage ip
Displays IP Information. For details, see
IP information, includes:
IP interface information: Interface number, IP address, subnet mask, VLAN number, and operational status.
Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use, gateway number, IP address, and health status
IP forwarding information: Enable status, lnet and lmask
Port status igmp
Displays IGMP Information Menu. For details, see page 109
. vrrp
Displays the VRRP Information Menu. For details, see
.
dump
Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 3 Menu (10K or more, depending on your configuration).
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.
94 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3/route
IP Routing Information
[IP Routing Menu]
find - Show a single route by destination IP address
gw - Show routes to a single gateway
type - Show routes of a single type
tag - Show routes of a single tag
if - Show routes on a single interface
dump - Show all routes
Using the commands listed below, you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in the switch.
Table 4-20 Route Information Menu Options (/info/l3/route)
Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>
Displays a single route by destination IP address.
gw <default gateway address (such as 192.4.17.44)>
Displays routes to a single gateway.
type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast
Displays routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-21 on page 96
.
tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|multicast
Displays routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing types, see Table 4-22 on page 97 .
if <interface number (1-128)>
Displays routes on a single interface.
dump
Displays all routes configured in the switch. For more information, see page 96 .
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 95
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3/route/dump
Show All IP Route Information
Status code: * - best
Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If
--------------- --------------- --------------- --------- --------- ---- --
* 11.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 11.0.0.1 direct fixed 211
* 11.0.0.1 255.255.255.255 11.0.0.1 local addr 211
* 11.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 11.255.255.255 broadcast broadcast 211
* 12.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 12.0.0.1 direct fixed 12
* 12.0.0.1 255.255.255.255 12.0.0.1 local addr 12
* 12.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 12.255.255.255 broadcast broadcast 12
* 13.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 11.0.0.2 indirect ospf 2 211
* 47.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 47.133.88.1 indirect static 24
* 47.133.88.0 255.255.255.0 47.133.88.46 direct fixed 24
* 172.30.52.223 255.255.255.255 172.30.52.223 broadcast broadcast 2
* 224.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 martian martian
* 224.0.0.5 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 multicast addr
The following table describes the Type parameters.
Table 4-21 IP Routing Type Parameters
Parameter indirect direct local broadcast martian multicast
Description
The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the Gateway address.
Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch.
Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.
Indicates a broadcast route.
The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out. Packets to this destination are discarded.
Indicates a multicast route.
96 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
The following table describes the Tag parameters.
Table 4-22 IP Routing Tag Parameters
Parameter fixed static addr rip ospf bgp broadcast martian multicast
Description
The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch.
The address is a static route which has been configured on the GbE Switch
Module.
The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.
The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP).
The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).
The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
Indicates a broadcast address.
The address belongs to a filtered group.
Indicates a multicast address.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 97
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3/arp
ARP Information
[Address Resolution Protocol Menu]
find - Show a single ARP entry by IP address
port - Show ARP entries on a single port
vlan - Show ARP entries on a single VLAN
addr - Show ARP address list
dump - Show all ARP entries
The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry, address status flags
(see
), VLAN and port for the address, and port referencing information.
Table 4-23 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101>
Displays a single ARP entry by IP address.
port <port alias or number>
Displays the ARP entries on a single port.
vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>
Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN.
addr
Displays the ARP address list: IP address, IP mask, MAC address, and VLAN flags.
dump
Displays all ARP entries. including:
IP address and MAC address of each entry
Address status flag (see below)
The VLAN and port to which the address belongs
The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP address shown)
For more information, see page 99
.
98 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3/arp/dump
Show All ARP Entry Information
IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port
--------------- ----- ----------------- ---- ----
47.80.22.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:86 1 INT6
47.80.23.243 P 00:03:42:fa:3b:30 1
47.80.23.245 00:c0:4f:60:3e:c1 1 INT6
190.10.10.1 P 00:03:42:fa:3b:30 10
N OTE – If you have VMA turned on, the referenced port will be the designated port. If you have
VMA turned off, the designated port will be the normal ingress port.
The Flag field is interpreted as follows:
Flag
P
R
U
Table 4-24 ARP Dump Flag Parameters
Description
Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.
Indirect route entry.
Unresolved ARP entry. The MAC address has not been learned.
/info/l3/arp/addr
ARP Address List Information
IP address IP mask MAC address VLAN Flags
--------------- --------------- ----------------- ---- -----
205.178.18.66 255.255.255.255 00:70:cf:03:20:04 P
205.178.50.1 255.255.255.255 00:70:cf:03:20:06 1
205.178.18.64 255.255.255.255 00:70:cf:03:20:05 1
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 99
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3/bgp
BGP Information
[BGP Menu]
peer - Show all BGP peers
summary - Show all BGP peers in summary
dump - Show BGP routing table
Table 4-25 BGP Peer Information Menu Options (/info/l3/bgp))
Command Syntax and Usage peer
Displays BGP peer information. See page 100
for a sample output.
summary
Displays peer summary information such as AS, message received, message sent, up/down, state.
See
dump
Displays the BGP routing table. See page 101
for a sample output.
/info/l3/bgp/peer
BGP Peer information
Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/peer provides.
BGP Peer Information:
3: 2.1.1.1 , version 0, TTL 1
Remote AS: 0, Local AS: 0, Link type: IBGP
Remote router ID: 0.0.0.0, Local router ID: 1.1.201.5
BGP status: idle, Old status: idle
Total received packets: 0, Total sent packets: 0
Received updates: 0, Sent updates: 0
Keepalive: 0, Holdtime: 0, MinAdvTime: 60
LastErrorCode: unknown(0), LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0)
Established state transitions: 0
4: 2.1.1.4 , version 0, TTL 1
Remote AS: 0, Local AS: 0, Link type: IBGP
Remote router ID: 0.0.0.0, Local router ID: 1.1.201.5
BGP status: idle, Old status: idle
Total received packets: 0, Total sent packets: 0
Received updates: 0, Sent updates: 0
Keepalive: 0, Holdtime: 0, MinAdvTime: 60
LastErrorCode: unknown(0), LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0)
Established state transitions: 0
100 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3/bgp/summary
BGP Summary information
Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/summary provides.
BGP Peer Summary Information:
Peer V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent Up/Down State
--------------- - -------- -------- -------- -------- ----------
1: 205.178.23.142 4 142 113 121 00:00:28 established
2: 205.178.15.148 0 148 0 0 never connect
/info/l3/bgp/dump
Show all BGP Information
Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/dump provides.
>> BGP# dump
Status codes: * valid, > best, i - internal
Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete
Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght Path
--------------- --------------- ----- ---- ----- --------------
*> 10.0.0.0 205.178.21.147 1 256 147 148 i
*>i205.178.15.0 0.0.0.0 0 i
* 205.178.21.147 1 128 147 i
*> 205.178.17.0 205.178.21.147 1 128 147 i
13.0.0.0 205.178.21.147 1 256 147 {35} ?
The 13.0.0.0 is filtered out by rrmap; or, a loop detected.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 101
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3/ospf
OSPF Information
[OSPF Information Menu]
general - Show general information
aindex - Show area(s) information
if - Show interface(s) information
virtual - Show details of virtual links
nbr - Show neighbor(s) information
dbase - Database Menu
sumaddr - Show summary address list
nsumadd - Show NSSA summary address list
routes - Show OSPF routes
dump - Show OSPF information
Table 4-26 OSPF Information Menu options (/info/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage general
Displays general OSPF information. See page 103
for a sample output.
aindex <area index [0-2]>
Displays area information for a particular area index. If no parameter is supplied, it displays area information for all the areas.
if <interface number [1-128]>
Displays interface information for a particular interface. If no parameter is supplied, it displays information for all the interfaces. See
virtual
Displays information about all the configured virtual links.
nbr <nbr router-id [A.B.C.D]>
Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID. If no router ID is supplied, it displays the information about all the current neighbors.
dbase
Displays OSPF database menu. To view menu options, see
sumaddr <area index [0-2]>
Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas.
nsumadd <area index [0-2]>
Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas.
routes
Displays OSPF routing table. See page 106
for a sample output.
102 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 4-26 OSPF Information Menu options (/info/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage dump
Displays the OSPF information.
/info/l3/ospf/general
OSPF General Information
OSPF Version 2
Router ID: 10.10.10.1
Started at 1663 and the process uptime is 4626
Area Border Router: yes, AS Boundary Router: no
LS types supported are 6
External LSA count 0
External LSA checksum sum 0x0
Number of interfaces in this router is 2
Number of virtual links in this router is 1
16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router
Total number of entries in the LSDB 10
Database checksum sum 0x0
Total neighbors are 1, of which
2 are >=INIT state,
2 are >=EXCH state,
2 are =FULL state
Number of areas is 2, of which 3-transit 0-nssa
Area Id : 0.0.0.0
Authentication : none
Import ASExtern : yes
Number of times SPF ran : 8
Area Border Router count : 2
AS Boundary Router count : 0
LSA count : 5
LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B
Summary : noSummary
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 103
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3/ospf/if
OSPF Interface Information
Ip Address 10.10.12.1, Area 0.0.0.1, Admin Status UP
Router ID 10.10.10.1, State DR, Priority 1
Designated Router (ID) 10.10.10.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.1
Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.10.14.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.2
Timer intervals, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 1663, Retransmit 5,
Poll interval 0, Transit delay 1
Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4, Authentication type none
/info/l3/ospf/dbase
OSPF Database Information
[OSPF Database Menu]
advrtr - LS Database info for an Advertising Router
asbrsum - ASBR Summary LS Database info
dbsumm - LS Database summary
ext - External LS Database info
nw - Network LS Database info
nssa - NSSA External LS Database info
rtr - Router LS Database info
self - Self Originated LS Database info
summ - Network-Summary LS Database info
all - All
Table 4-27 OSPF Database Information Menu Options (/info/l3/ospf/dbase)
Command Syntax and Usage advrtr <router-id (A.B.C.D)>
Takes advertising router as a parameter. Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in the
LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID, for example: 20.1.1.1.
asbrsum <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)> | <link_state_id (A.B.C.D> | <self>
Displays ASBR summary LSAs. The usage of this command is as follows: a) asbrsum adv-rtr 20.1.1.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising router 20.1.1.1.
b) asbrsum link_state_id 10.1.1.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link state ID 10.1.1.1. c) asbrsum self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs.
d) asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs.
104 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 4-27 OSPF Database Information Menu Options (/info/l3/ospf/dbase)
Command Syntax and Usage dbsumm
Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format: a) the number of LSAs of each type in each area.
b) the total number of LSAs for each area.
c) the total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined.
d) the total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined.
No parameters are required.
ext <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>
Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.
nw <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>
Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA.network LS database. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.
nssa <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>
Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.
rtr <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>
Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.
self
Displays all the self-advertised LSAs. No parameters are required.
summ <adv-rtr (A.B.C.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.C.D>|<self>
Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.
The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.
all
Displays all the LSAs.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 105
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3/ospf/routes
OSPF Information Route Codes
Codes: IA - OSPF inter area,
N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2
E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2
IA 10.10.0.0/16 via 200.1.1.2
IA 40.1.1.0/28 via 20.1.1.2
IA 80.1.1.0/24 via 200.1.1.2
IA 100.1.1.0/24 via 20.1.1.2
IA 140.1.1.0/27 via 20.1.1.2
IA 150.1.1.0/28 via 200.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.1/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.2/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.3/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.4/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.5/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.6/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.7/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.8/32 via 30.1.1.2
106 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3/rip
Routing Information Protocol Information
[RIP Information Menu]
routes - Show RIP routes
dump - Show RIP user's configuration
Use this menu to view information about the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) configuration and statistics.
Table 4-28 RIP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/rip)
Command Syntax and Usage routes
Displays RIP routes. For more information, see
dump <interface number or zero for all IFs)>
Displays RIP user’s configuration. For more information, see
/info/l3/rip/routes
RIP Routes Information
>> IP Routing# /info/l3/rip/routes
3.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.11 metric 4
4.0.0.0/16 via 30.1.1.11 metric 16
10.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.2 metric 3
20.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.2 metric 2
This table contains all dynamic routes learnt through RIP, including the routes that are undergoing garbage collection with metric = 16. This table does not contain directly connected routes and locally configured static routes.
/info/l3/rip/dump <interface number>
Show RIP User Configuration
RIP USER CONFIGURATION :
RIP on updat 30
RIP Interface 2 : 102.1.1.1, enabled
version 2, listen enabled, supply enabled, default none
poison disabled, trigg enabled, mcast enabled, metric 1
auth none,key none
RIP Interface 3 : 103.1.1.1, enabled
version 2, listen enabled, supply enabled, default none
poison disabled, trigg enabled, mcast enabled, metric 1
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 107
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3/ip
IP Information
IP information:
AS number 0
Interface information:
1: 10.200.30.3 255.255.0.0 10.200.255.255, vlan 1, up
128: 10.90.90.97 255.255.255.0 10.90.90.255, vlan 4095, up
Default gateway information: metric strict
1: 10.200.1.1, vlan any, up
Current BOOTP relay settings: OFF
0.0.0.0, 0.0.0.0
Current IP forwarding settings: ON, dirbr disabled, noicmprd disabled
Current network filter settings:
none
Current route map settings:
IP information includes:
IP interface information: Interface number, IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address,
VLAN number, and operational status.
Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use, gateway number, IP address, and health status
BootP relay settings
IP forwarding settings, including the forwarding status of directed broadcasts, and the status of ICMP re-directs
Network filter settings
Route map settings
108 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3/igmp
IGMP Multicast Group Information
[IGMP Multicast Menu]
mrouter - Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port information
find - Show a single group by IP group address
vlan - Show groups on a single vlan
port - Show groups on a single port
trunk - Show groups on a single trunk
detail - Show detail of a single group by IP group address
dump - Show all groups
describes the commands used to display information about IGMP groups learned by the switch.
Table 4-29 IGMP Multicast Group Information Menu Options (/info/l3/igmp)
Command Syntax and Usage mrouter
Displays IGMP Multicast Router menu. To view menu options, see page 110 .
find <IP address>
Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address. vlan <VLAN number>
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN. port <port number or alias>
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port.
trunk <Trunk Group number>
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group.
detail <IP address>
Displays details about IGMP multicast groups, including source and timer information. dump
Displays information for all multicast groups.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 109
Alteon OS Command Reference
info/l3/igmp/dump
IGMP Group Information
Note: Local groups (224.0.0.x) are not snooped/relayed and will not appear.
Source Group VLAN Port Version Mode Expires Fwd
-------------- --------------- ------- ------ -------- ----- ------- ---
10.1.1.1 232.1.1.1 2 EXT4 V3 INC 4:16 Yes
10.1.1.5 232.1.1.1 2 EXT4 V3 INC 4:16 Yes
* 232.1.1.1 2 EXT4 V3 INC - No
10.10.10.43 235.0.0.1 9 EXT1 V3 INC 2:26 Yes
* 236.0.0.1 9 EXT1 V3 EXC - Yes
IGMP Group information includes:
IGMP source address
IGMP Group address
VLAN and port
IGMP version
IGMPv3 filter mode
Expiration timer value
IGMP multicast forwarding state
/info/l3/igmp/mrouter
IGMP Multicast Router Port Information
[IGMP Multicast Router Menu]
vlan - Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan
dump - Show all learned multicast router ports
describes the commands used to display information about multicast routers
(Mrouters) learned through IGMP Snooping.
Table 4-30 IGMP Mrouter Information Menu Options (/info/igmp/mrouter)
Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number>
Displays the multicast router ports configured or learned on the selected VLAN. dump
Displays information for all multicast groups learned by the switch.
110 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
info/l3/igmp/mrouter/dump
IGMP Mrouter Information
VLAN Port Version Expires Max Query Resp. Time QRV QQIC
------- ------- --------- -------- ----------------------- ---- ---
1 EXT1 V3 4:09 128 2 125
2 EXT3 V2 4:09 125 - -
3 EXT4 V2 static unknown - -
IGMP Mrouter information includes:
VLAN and port where the Mrouter is connected
IGMP version
Mrouter expiration
Maximum query response time
Querier’s Robustness Variable (QRV)
Querier’s Query Interval Code (QQIC)
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 111
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/l3/vrrp
VRRP Information
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on GbE Switch Module provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.
VRRP information:
1: vrid 2, 205.178.18.210, if 1, renter, prio 100, master, server
2: vrid 1, 205.178.18.202, if 1, renter, prio 100, backup
3: vrid 3, 205.178.18.204, if 1, renter, prio 100, master, proxy
When virtual routers are configured, you can view the status of each virtual router using this command. VRRP information includes:
Virtual router number
Virtual router ID and IP address
Interface number
Ownership status
owner identifies the preferred master virtual router. A virtual router is the owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same.
renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device.
Priority value. During the election process, the virtual router with the highest priority becomes master.
Activity status
master backup
identifies the elected master virtual router.
identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode.
init identifies that the virtual router is waiting for a startup event.
For example, once it receives a startup event, it transitions to master if its priority is 255, (the IP address owner), or transitions to backup if it is not the IP address owner.
Server status. The server state identifies virtual routers.
Proxy status. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers, where the virtual router shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address. The use of virtual proxy routers enables redundant switches to share the same IP address, minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must be configured.
112 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
/info/qos
Quality of Service Information
[QoS Menu]
8021p - Show QOS 802.1p information
Table 4-31 QoS Menu Options (/info/qos)
Command Syntax and Usage
8021p
Displays the 802.1p Information Menu. For details, see page 113
.
/info/qos/8021p
802.1p Information
Current priority to COS queue information:
Priority COSq Weight
-------- ---- ------
0 0 1
1 0 1
2 0 1
3 0 1
4 1 2
5 1 2
6 1 2
7 1 2
Current port priority information:
Port Priority COSq Weight
----- -------- ---- ------
INT1 0 0 1
INT2 0 0 1
...
MGT1 0 0 1
MGT2 0 0 1
EXT1 0 0 1
EXT2 0 0 1
EXT3 0 0 1
EXT4 0 0 1
EXT5 0 0 1
EXT6 0 0 1
Alteon OS Command Reference
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 113
Alteon OS Command Reference
The following table describes the IEEE 802.1p priority to COS queue information.
Table 4-32 802.1p Priority-to-COS Queue Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Priority
COSq
Weight
Description
Displays the 802.1p Priority level.
Displays the Class of Service queue.
Displays the scheduling weight of the COS queue.
The following table describes the IEEE 802.1p port priority information.
Table 4-33 802.1p Port Priority Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Port
Priority
COSq
Weight
Description
Displays the port alias.
Displays the 802.1p Priority level.
Displays the Class of Service queue.
Displays the scheduling weight.
114 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
info/acl
Access Control List Information
Current ACL information:
------------------------
Filter 2 profile:
Ethernet
- VID : 2/0xfff
No ACL groups configured.
Access Control List (ACL) information includes configuration settings for each ACL and
ACL Group.
Table 4-34 ACL Parameter Descriptions
Parameter
Filter x profile
Actions
Description
Indicates the ACL number.
Displays the configured action for the ACL.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 115
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/link
Link Status Information
Alias Port Speed Duplex Flow Ctrl Link
---- ----- ----- -------- --TX-----RX-- ------
INT1 1 1000 full yes yes up
INT2 2 1000 full yes yes up
INT3 3 1000 full yes yes up
INT4 4 1000 full yes yes up
INT5 5 1000 full yes yes down
INT6 6 1000 full yes yes up
INT7 7 1000 full yes yes up
INT8 8 1000 full yes yes up
INT9 9 1000 full yes yes up
INT10 10 1000 full yes yes up
INT11 11 1000 full yes yes up
INT12 12 1000 full yes yes up
INT13 13 1000 full yes yes up
INT14 14 1000 full yes yes up
MGT1 15 100 full yes yes up
MGT2 16 100 full yes yes up
EXT1 17 1000 any yes yes up
EXT2 18 1000 any yes yes up
EXT3 19 1000 any yes yes up
EXT4 20 1000 any yes yes up
EXT5 21 1000 any yes yes up
EXT6 22 1000 any yes yes up
N OTE – The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.
Use this command to display link status information about each port on an GbE Switch Module slot, including:
Port alias
Port speed (10, 100, 1000, or any)
Duplex mode (half, full, any, or auto)
Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or auto)
Link status (up, down, or disabled)
116 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/port
Port Information
Alias Port Tag Fast Lrn PVID NAME VLAN(s)
----- ---- --- ---- --- ---- -------------- ------------------------
INT1 1 y n e 1 INT1 1 10 4095
INT2 2 y n e 1 INT2 1 4095
INT3 3 y n e 1 INT3 1 4095
INT4 4 y n e 1 INT4 1 4095
INT5 5 y n e 1 INT5 1 4095
INT6 6 y n e 1 INT6 1 4095
INT7 7 y n e 1 INT7 1 4095
INT8 8 y n e 1 INT8 1 4095
INT9 9 y n e 1 INT9 1 4095
INT10 10 y n e 1 INT10 1 4095
INT11 11 y n e 1 INT11 1 4095
INT12 12 y n e 1 INT12 1 4095
INT13 13 y n e 1 INT13 1 4095
INT14 14 y n e 1 INT14 1 4095
MGT1 15 y n e 4095*MGT 4095
MGT2 16 y n e 4095*MGT 4095
EXT1 17 n n e 1 EXT1 1
EXT2 18 n n e 1 EXT2 1
EXT3 19 y n e 1 EXT3 1
EXT4 20 y n e 1 EXT4 1
EXT5 21 y n e 1 EXT4 1
EXT6 22 y n e 1 EXT4 1
* = PVID is tagged.
N OTE – The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.
Port information includes:
Port alias
Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n)
Port VLAN ID (PVID)
Port name
VLAN membership
Whether the port is configured for Port Fast Fowarding (Fast)
Whether the port is enabled for FDB Learning (Lrn)
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 117
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/geaport
Logical Port to GEA Port Mapping
Alias Logical Port GEA Port(0-based) GEA Unit
----- ------------ ----------------- ---------
INT1 1 3 0
INT2 2 2 0
INT3 3 11 1
INT4 4 10 1
INT5 5 9 1
INT6 6 8 1
INT7 7 7 1
INT8 8 6 1
INT9 9 1 1
INT10 10 0 1
INT11 11 3 1
INT12 12 2 1
INT13 13 20 0
INT14 14 6 0
MGT1 15 1 0
MGT2 16 6 0
EXT1 17 10 0
EXT2 18 9 0
EXT3 19 8 0
EXT4 20 7 0
EXT5 21 5 0
EXT6 22 4 0
N OTE – The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed.
This display correlates the port alias to logical port number, and shows the GEA unit on which each port resides.
118 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/info/sfp
Fiber Port SFP Status
Port Device TX-Enable RX-Signal TX-Fault
---- ------ --------- --------- --------
EXT1 FI-SFP enabled LOST none
EXT2 FI-SFP enabled LOST none
EXT3 FI-SFP enabled LOST none
EXT4 FI-SFP enabled LOST none
EXT5 FI-SFP enabled LOST none
EXT6 FI-SFP enabled LOST none
This command displays the status of the Small Form Pluggable (SFP) module on each Fiber
External Port.
/info/dump
Information Dump
Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu
(10K or more, depending on your configuration). This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance.
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 119
Alteon OS Command Reference
120 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 40M2420, April 2007
C HAPTER 5
The Statistics Menu
You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes.
This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics.
/stats
Statistics Menu
[Statistics Menu]
port - Port Stats Menu
clrports - Clear stats for all ports
l2 - Layer 2 Stats Menu
l3 - Layer 3 Stats Menu
mp - MP-specific Stats Menu
acl - ACL Stats Menu
snmp - Show SNMP stats
ntp - Show NTP stats
clrmp - Clear all MP related stats
dump - Dump all stats
40M2420, April 2007 121
Alteon OS Command Reference
The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in
, with pointers to detailed information.
Table 5-1 Statistics Menu Options (/stats)
Command Syntax and Usage port <port alias or number>
Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port. Use this command to display traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base
(MIB) objects. To view menu options, see page 123
.
clrports
Clears statistics counters for all ports. l2
Displays the Layer 2 Stats Menu. To view menu options, see page 135
.
l3
Displays the Layer 3 Stats Menu. To view menu options, see page 137
.
mp
Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. Use this command to view information on how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated. To view menu
.
acl
Displays ACL Statistics menu. To view menu options, see
snmp
Displays SNMP statistics. See
ntp <clear>
Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) Statistics. See page 166
for a sample output and a description of NTP Statistics.
You can execute the clear command option to delete all statistics.
clrmp
Clears all management processor statistics. dump
Dumps all switch statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. For details, see
122 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/port <port alias or number>
Port Statistics
This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. Traffic statistics include SNMP
Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
[Port Statistics Menu]
8021x - Show 802.1x stats
brg - Show bridging ("dot1") stats
ether - Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats
if - Show interface ("if") stats
ip - Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats
link - Show link stats
clear - Clear all port stats
Table 5-2 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
8021x
Displays IEEE 802.1x statistics for the port. See
brg
Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. See page 127 for sample output.
ether
Displays Ethernet (“dot3”) statistics for the port. See page 129 for sample output.
if
Displays interface statistics for the port. See page 132
for sample output.
ip
Displays IP statistics for the port. See page 134 for sample output.
link
Displays link statistics for the port. See page 134 for sample output.
clear
This command clears all the statistics on the port.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 123
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/port <port alias or number>/8021x
802.1x Authenticator Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the 802.1x authenticator statistics of the selected port.
Authenticator Statistics:
eapolFramesRx = 925
eapolFramesTx = 3201
eapolStartFramesRx = 2
eapolLogoffFramesRx = 0
eapolRespIdFramesRx = 463
eapolRespFramesRx = 460
eapolReqIdFramesTx = 1820
eapolReqFramesTx = 1381
invalidEapolFramesRx = 0
eapLengthErrorFramesRx = 0
lastEapolFrameVersion = 1
lastEapolFrameSource = 00:01:02:45:ac:51
Table 5-3 802.1x Authenticator Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x)
Statistics Description
Total number of EAPOL frames received eapolFramesRx eapolFramesTx Total number of EAPOL frames transmitted eapolStartFramesRx Total number of EAPOL Start frames received eapolLogoff-
FramesRx
Total number of EAPOL Logoff frames received eapolRespId-
FramesRx
Total number of EAPOL Response Identity frames received eapolRespFramesRx Total number of Response frames received eapolReqIdFramesTx Total number of Request Identity frames transmitted eapolReqFramesTx invalidEapol-
FramesRx
Total number of Request frames transmitted
Total number of invalid EAPOL frames received eapLengthError-
FramesRx
Total number of EAP length error frames received lastEapolFrameVersion
The protocol version number carried in the most recently received
EAPOL frame.
124 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-3 802.1x Authenticator Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x)
Description Statistics lastEapolFrame-
Source
The source MAC address carried in the most recently received
EAPOL frame.
/stats/port <port alias or number>/8021x
802.1x Authenticator Diagnostics
This menu option enables you to display the 802.1x authenticator diagnostics of the selected port.
Authenticator Diagnostics:
authEntersConnecting = 1820
authEapLogoffsWhileConnecting = 0
authEntersAuthenticating = 463
authSuccessesWhileAuthenticating = 5
authTimeoutsWhileAuthenticating = 0
authFailWhileAuthenticating = 458
authReauthsWhileAuthenticating = 0
authEapStartsWhileAuthenticating = 0
authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticating = 0
authReauthsWhileAuthenticated = 3
authEapStartsWhileAuthenticated = 0
authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticated = 0
backendResponses = 923
backendAccessChallenges = 460
backendOtherRequestsToSupplicant = 460
backendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant = 460
backendAuthSuccesses = 5
backendAuthFails = 458
Table 5-4 802.1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x)
Statistics Description authEntersConnecting
Total number of times that the state machine transitions to the
CONNECTING state from any other state.
authEapLogoffsWhileConnecting
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from
CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an
EAPOL-Logoff message.
authEntersAuthenticating
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from
CONNECTING to AUTHENTICATING, as a result of an EAP-
Response/Identity message being received from the Supplicant.
Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 125
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-4 802.1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x)
Statistics authSuccessesWhileAuthenticating
Description
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from
AUTHENTICATING to AUTHENTICATED, as a result of the Backend
Authentication state machine indicating successful authentication of the
Supplicant. authTimeoutsWhile-
Authenticating
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from
AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication timeout. authFailWhileAuthenticating
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from
AUTHENTICATING to HELD, as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication failure. authReauthsWhile-
Authenticating authEapStartsWhileAuthenticating authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticating
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHEN-
TICATING to ABORTING, as a result of a re-authentication request
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from
AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of an EAPOL-Start message being received from the Supplicant.
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from
AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result of an EAPOL-Logoff message being received from the Supplicant.
authReauthsWhile-
Authenticated authEapStartsWhileAuthenticated authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticated
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHEN-
TICATED to CONNECTING, as a result of a re-authentication request.
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from
AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING, as a result of an EAPOL-Start message being received from the Supplicant.
Total number of times that the state machine transitions from
AUTHENTICATED to DISCONNECTED, as a result of an EAPOL-
Logoff message being received from the Supplicant.
backendResponses backendAccessChallenges
Total number of times that the state machine sends an initial Access-
Request packet to the Authentication server. Indicates that the Authenticator attempted communication with the Authentication Server.
Total number of times that the state machine receives an initial Access-
Challenge packet from the Authentication server. Indicates that the
Authentication Server has communication with the Authenticator.
backendOtherRequestsToSupplicant
Total number of times that the state machine sends an EAP-Request packet (other than an Identity, Notification, Failure, or Success message) to the Supplicant. Indicates that the Authenticator chose an EAP-method.
126 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-4 802.1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (/stats/port/8021x)
Statistics backendAuthFails
Description backendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant
Total number of times that the state machine receives a response from the
Supplicant to an initial EAP-Request, and the response is something other than EAP-NAK. Indicates that the Supplicant can respond to the Authenticator.s chosen EAP-method. backendAuthSuccesses
Total number of times that the state machine receives an Accept message from the Authentication Server. Indicates that the Supplicant has successfully authenticated to the Authentication Server.
Total number of times that the state machine receives a Reject message from the Authentication Server. Indicates that the Supplicant has not authenticated to the Authentication Server.
/stats/port <port alias or number>/brg
Bridging Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port.
Bridging statistics for port INT1: dot1PortInFrames: 63242584 dot1PortOutFrames: 63277826 dot1PortInDiscards: 0 dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: 0 dot1StpPortForwardTransitions: 0
Table 5-5 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg)
Statistics dot1PortInFrames
Description
The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment. A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames.
dot1PortOutFrames The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function, including bridge management frames.
dot1PortInDiscards Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is, filtered) by the Forwarding Process.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 127
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-5 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg)
Statistics Description dot1TpLearnedEntry
Discards
The total number of Forwarding Database entries, which have been or would have been learnt, but have been discarded due to a lack of space to store them in the Forwarding Database. If this counter is increasing, it indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing, it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent.
dot1StpPortForward
Transitions
The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state.
128 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/port <port alias or number>/ether
Ethernet Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port
Ethernet statistics for port INT1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: 0 dot3StatsFCSErrors: 0 dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: 0 dot3StatsLateCollisions: 0 dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: NA dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: 0 dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: 0
Table 5-6 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether)
Statistics Description dot3StatsAlignment
Errors
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) check.
The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the
Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.
dot3StatsFCSErrors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) check.
The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the
LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer
Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.
dot3StatsSingle-
CollisionFrames
A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.
A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMulticastPkts , or ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollision-
Frame object.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 129
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-6 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether)
Statistics Description dot3StatsMultiple-
CollisionFrames
A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.
A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMulticastPkts , or ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollision-
Frames object.
dot3StatsLate-
Collisions dot3StatsExcessive
Collisions
The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a packet.
Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51.2 microseconds on a
10 Mbit/s system. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of other collision-related statistics.
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions.
dot3StatsInternal-
MacTransmitErrors dot3StatsFrameToo-
Longs
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object, the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object, or the dot3Stats-
CarrierSenseErrors object.
The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted.
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC
(or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer
Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.
130 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-6 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether)
Statistics Description dot3StatsInternal-
MacReceiveErrors
A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object, the dot3Stats-
AlignmentErrors object, or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object.
The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object may represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 131
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/port <port alias or number>/if
Interface Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port.
Interface statistics for port EXT1:
ifHCIn Counters ifHCOut Counters
Octets: 51697080313 51721056808
UcastPkts: 65356399 65385714
BroadcastPkts: 0 6516
MulticastPkts: 0 0
Discards: 0 0
Errors: 0 21187
Table 5-7 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if)
Statistics ifInOctets ifInUcastPkts ifInBroadcastPkts ifInMulticastPkts ifInDiscards ifInErrors
Description
The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub- layer, which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sublayer.
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub- layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.
The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces, the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
132 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-7 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if)
Statistics ifInUnknownProtos ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts
Description
For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces which support protocol multiplexing, the number of transmission units received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. For any interface which does not support protocol multiplexing, this counter will always be 0.
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
ifOutBroadcastPkts The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent. This object is a 64bit version of ifOutBroadcastPkts.
ifOutMulticastPkts The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses. This object is a 64-bit version of ifOutMulticastPkts.
ifOutDiscards The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.
One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.
ifOutErrors For packet-oriented interfaces, the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces, the number of outbound transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 133
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/port <port alias or number>/ip
Interface Protocol Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port.
GEA IP statistics for port INT1: ipInReceives : 0 ipInHeaderError: 0 ipInDiscards : 0
Table 5-8 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip)
Statistics ipInReceives ipInHeaderErrors ipInDiscards
Description
The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in error.
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their
IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch).
The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.
/stats/port <port alias or number>/link
Link Statistics
This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port.
Link statistics for port INT1: linkStateChange: 1
Table 5-9 Link Statistics (/stats/port/link)
Statistics linkStateChange
Description
The total number of link state changes.
134 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/l2
Layer 2 Statistics
[Layer 2 Statistics Menu]
fdb - Show FDB stats
lacp - Show LACP stats
The Layer 2 statistics provided by each menu option are briefly described in
, with pointers to detailed information.
Table 5-10 Layer 2 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage fdb
Displays FDB statistics. See page 135
for sample output.
lacp <port alias or number>
Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics. See
/stats/l2/fdb
FDB Statistics
FDB statistics:
current: 83 hiwat: 855
This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database, including the number of new entries, finds, and unsuccessful searches.
FDB statistics are described in the following table:
Table 5-11 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/fdb)
Statistic current hiwat
Description
Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database.
Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding
Database.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 135
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/l2/lacp <port alias or number>
LACP Statistics
Port EXT1:
--------------------------------------
Valid LACPDUs received: - 870
Valid Marker PDUs received: - 0
Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received: - 0
Unknown version/TLV type: - 0
Illegal subtype received: - 0
LACPDUs transmitted: - 6031
Marker PDUs transmitted: - 0
Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted: - 0
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics are described in the following table:
Table 5-12 LACP Statistics (/stats/lacp)
Statistic Description
Total number of valid LACP data units received. Valid LACPDUs received
Valid Marker PDUs received
Total number of valid LACP marker data units received.
Valid Marker Rsp
PDUs received
Illegal subtype received
Total number of valid LACP marker response data units received.
Unknown version/TLV type
Total number of LACP data units with an unknown version or type, length, and value (TLV) received.
Total number of LACP data units with an illegal subtype received.
LACPDUs transmitted Total number of LACP data units transmitted.
Marker PDUs transmitted
Total number of LACP marker data units transmitted.
Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted
Total number of LACP marker response data units transmitted.
136 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/l3
Layer 3 Statistics
[Layer 3 Statistics Menu]
geal3 - GEA Layer 3 Stats Menu
ip - Show IP stats
route - Show route stats
arp - Show ARP stats
dns - Show DNS stats
icmp - Show ICMP stats
tcp - Show TCP stats
udp - Show UDP stats
igmp - Show IGMP stats
ospf - OSPF stats
vrrp - Show VRRP stats
clrvrrp - Clear VRRP stats
rip - Show RIP stats
igmpgrps - Total number of IGMP groups
ipmcgrps - Total number of IPMC groups
clrigmp - Clear IGMP stats
ipclear - Clear IP stats
dump - Dump layer 3 stats
The Layer 3 statistics provided by each menu option are briefly described in
, with pointers to detailed information.
Table 5-13 Layer 3 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage geal3
Displays the Gigabit Ethernet Aggregators (GEA) statistics menu. GEA statistics are used by service and support personnel. ip
Displays IP statistics. See
route
Displays route statistics. See
arp
Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics. See
dns
Displays Domain Name System (DNS) statistics. See page 142
for sample output.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 137
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-13 Layer 3 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage icmp
Displays ICMP statistics. See page 142 for sample output.
tcp
Displays TCP statistics. See
udp
Displays UDP statistics. See
igmp
Displays IGMP statistics. See
ospf
Displays OSPF statistics. See page 149
for sample output. vrrp
When virtual routers are configured, you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP:
Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers)
Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers)
Advertisements received, but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers)
See
clrvrrp
Clears VRRP statistics. rip
Displays Routing Information Protocol (RIP) statistics. See
igmpgrps
Displays the total number of IGMP groups that are registered on the switch. ipmcgrps
Displays the total number of current IP multicast groups that are registered on the switch. clrigmp
Clears IGMP statistics. ipclear
Clears IP statistics. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP statistics.
dump
Dumps all Layer 3 statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command.
138 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/l3/ip
IP Statistics
IP statistics: ipInReceives: 3115873 ipInHdrErrors: 1 ipInAddrErrors: 35447 ipForwDatagrams: 0 ipInUnknownProtos: 500504 ipInDiscards: 0 ipInDelivers: 2334166 ipOutRequests: 1010542 ipOutDiscards: 4 ipOutNoRoutes: 4 ipReasmReqds: 0 ipReasmOKs: 0 ipReasmFails: 0 ipFragOKs: 0 ipFragFails: 0 ipFragCreates: 0 ipRoutingDiscards: 0 ipDefaultTTL: 255 ipReasmTimeout: 5
Table 5-14 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip)
Statistics ipInReceives ipInHdrErrors ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos ipInDiscards
Description
The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in error.
The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and so forth.
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their
IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). This count includes invalid addresses (for example,
0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example, Class E). For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address.
The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways, this counter will include only those packets, which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch), and the Source- Route option processing was successful.
The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 139
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-14 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip)
Statistics ipInDelivers ipOutRequests ipOutDiscards ipOutNoRoutes ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails ipFragCreates ipRoutingDiscards ipDefaultTTL
Description
The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP).
The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams .
The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.
The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams, which meet this no-route criterion. Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down.
The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity (the switch).
The number of IP datagrams successfully re- assembled.
The number of failures detected by the IP re- assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so forth). Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received.
The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity (the switch).
The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity (the switch) but could not be, for example, because their Don't Fragment flag was set.
The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity (the switch).
The number of routing entries, which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries.
The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the
IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch), whenever a
TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol.
140 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-14 IP Statistics (stats/l3/ip)
Statistics ipReasmTimeout
Description
The maximum number of seconds, which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity (the switch).
/stats/l3/route
Route Statistics
Route statistics: ipRoutesCur: 11 ipRoutesHighWater: 11 ipRoutesMax: 2048
Table 5-15 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route)
Statistics ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax
Description
The total number of outstanding routes in the route table.
The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table.
The maximum number of routes that are supported.
/stats/l3/arp
ARP statistics
This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics.
ARP statistics: arpEntriesCur: 3 arpEntriesHighWater: 4 arpEntriesMax: 4095
Table 5-16 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp)
Statistics arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax
Description
The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table.
The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table.
The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 141
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/l3/dns
DNS Statistics
This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics.
DNS statistics: dnsInRequests: 0 dnsOutRequests: 0 dnsBadRequests: 0
Table 5-17 DNS Statistics (/stats/dns)
Statistics dnsInRequests dnsOutRequests dnsBadRequests
Description
The total number of DNS request packets that have been received.
The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted.
The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped.
/stats/l3/icmp
ICMP Statistics
ICMP statistics: icmpInMsgs: 245802 icmpInErrors: 1393 icmpInDestUnreachs: 41 icmpInTimeExcds: 0 icmpInParmProbs: 0 icmpInSrcQuenchs: 0 icmpInRedirects: 0 icmpInEchos: 18 icmpInEchoReps: 244350 icmpInTimestamps: 0 icmpInTimestampReps: 0 icmpInAddrMasks: 0 icmpInAddrMaskReps: 0 icmpOutMsgs: 253810 icmpOutErrors: 0 icmpOutDestUnreachs: 15 icmpOutTimeExcds: 0 icmpOutParmProbs: 0 icmpOutSrcQuenchs: 0 icmpOutRedirects: 0 icmpOutEchos: 253777 icmpOutEchoReps: 18 icmpOutTimestamps: 0 icmpOutTimestampReps: 0 icmpOutAddrMasks: 0 icmpOutAddrMaskReps: 0
Table 5-18 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp)
Statistics icmpInMsgs icmpInErrors
Description
The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors .
The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums , bad length, and so forth).
142 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-18 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp)
Statistics icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInTimeExcds icmpInParmProbs icmpInSrcQuenchs icmpInRedirects icmpInEchos icmpInEchoReps icmpInTimestamps icmpInTimestampReps icmpInAddrMasks icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutMsgs icmpOutErrors icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutRedirects icmpOutEchos icmpOutEchoReps
Description
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.
The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full, stop sending data) messages received.
The number of ICMP Redirect messages received.
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.
The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received.
The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received.
The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.
The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received.
The total number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) attempted to send. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.
The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer. This value should not include errors discovered outside the
ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that contribute to this counter's value.
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.
The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full, stop sending data) messages sent.
The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. For a host, this object will always be zero, since hosts do not send redirects.
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 143
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-18 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp)
Statistics icmpOutTimestamps icmpOutTimestampReps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpOutAddrMaskReps
Description
The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent.
The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent.
The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent.
The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.
144 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/l3/tcp
TCP Statistics
TCP statistics: tcpRtoAlgorithm: 4 tcpRtoMin: 0 tcpRtoMax: 240000 tcpMaxConn: 512 tcpActiveOpens: 252214 tcpPassiveOpens: 7 tcpAttemptFails: 528 tcpEstabResets: 4 tcpInSegs: 756401 tcpOutSegs: 756655 tcpRetransSegs: 0 tcpInErrs: 0 tcpCurBuff: 0 tcpCurConn: 3 tcpOutRsts: 417
Table 5-19 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp)
Statistics tcpRtoAlgorithm tcpRtoMin tcpRtoMax tcpMaxConn tcpActiveOpens tcpPassiveOpens tcpAttemptFails
Description
The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets.
The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793.
The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793.
The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity (the switch) can support. In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic, this object should contain the value -1.
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state.
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state.
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state, plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 145
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-19 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp)
Statistics tcpEstabResets tcpInSegs tcpOutSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpInErrs tcpCurBuff tcpCurConn tcpOutRsts
Description
The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE-
WAIT state.
The total number of segments received, including those received in error.
This count includes segments received on currently established connections.
The total number of segments sent, including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets.
The total number of segments retransmitted - that is, the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets.
The total number of segments received in error (for example, bad TCP checksums ).
The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol stack.
The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened.
The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag.
146 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/l3/udp
UDP Statistics
UDP statistics: udpInDatagrams: 54 udpOutDatagrams: 43 udpInErrors: 0 udpNoPorts: 1578077
Table 5-20 UDP Statistics (/stats/l3/udp)
Statistics udpInDatagrams udpOutDatagrams udpInErrors udpNoPorts
Description
The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch.
The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch).
The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.
The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 147
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/l3/igmp <VLAN number>
IGMP Statistics
IGMP Snoop vlan 2 statistics:
----------------------------------------------------------------------rxIgmpValidPkts: 0 rxIgmpInvalidPkts: 0 rxIgmpGenQueries: 0 rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries: 0 rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries: 0 rxIgmpLeaves: 0 rxIgmpReports: 0 txIgmpReports: 0 txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries: 0 txIgmpLeaves: 0 rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords: 0 rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords:0 rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords: 0
This menu option displays statistics about the use of the IGMP Multicast Groups.
IGMP statistics are described in the following table:
Table 5-21 IGMP Statistics (/stats/l3/igmp)
Statistic rxIgmpValidPkts
Description
Total number of valid IGMP packets received rxIgmpInvalidPkts Total number of invalid packets received rxIgmpGenQueries rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries rxIgmpLeaves
Total number of General Membership Query packets received
Total number of Membership Query packets received from specific groups
Total number of Group Source-Specific Queries
(GSSQ) received
Total number of Leave requests received rxIgmpReports Total number of Membership Reports received txIgmpReports Total number of Membership reports transmitted txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries Total number of Membership Query packets transmitted to specific groups
Total number of Leave messages transmitted txIgmpLeaves rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords Total number of Current State records received rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords Total number of Source List Change records received. rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords Total number of Filter Change records received.
148 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
/stats/l3/ospf
OSPF Statistics
[OSPF stats Menu]
general - Show global stats
aindex - Show area(s) stats
if - Show interface(s) stats
Table 5-22 OSPF Statistics Menu (/stats/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage general
Displays global statistics. See
aindex
Displays area statistics.
if
Displays interface statistics.
Alteon OS Command Reference
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 149
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/l3/ospf/general
OSPF Global Statistics
The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
OSPF stats
----------
Rx/Tx Stats: Rx Tx
-------- --------
Pkts 0 0
hello 23 518
database 4 12
ls requests 3 1
ls acks 7 7
ls updates 9 7
Nbr change stats: Intf change Stats:
hello 2 hello 4
start 0 down 2
n2way 2 loop 0
adjoint ok 2 unloop 0
negotiation done 2 wait timer 2
exchange done 2 backup 0
bad requests 0 nbr change 5
bad sequence 0
loading done 2
n1way 0
rst_ad 0
down 1
Timers kickoff
hello 514
retransmit 1028
lsa lock 0
lsa ack 0
dbage 0
summary 0
ase export 0
150 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-23 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general)
Description Statistics
Rx/Tx Stats:
Rx Pkts
Tx Pkts
Rx Hello
Tx Hello
Rx Database
Tx Database
Rx ls Requests
Tx ls Requests
Rx ls Acks
Tx ls Acks
Rx ls Updates
Tx ls Updates
The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all
OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all
OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 151
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-23 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued)
Description Statistics
Nbr Change Stats: hello
Start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down
The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is, an indication that
Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds.) across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this router and other neighboring routers.
The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all
OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave relationship has been negotiated, and sequence numbers have been exchanged, across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is, in an adjacency's final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets, across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF areas.
The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received that either:
a) Has an unexpected DD sequence number
b) Unexpectedly has the init bit set
c) Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a Database Description packet.
Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors, in which this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas.
The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces.
The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is, in the initial state of a neighbor conversation.) across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
152 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-23 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued)
Statistics Description
Intf Change Stats: hello The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas.
down loop unloop wait timer
The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas.
The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total number of interfaces, connected to the attached network in all OSPF areas.
The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired, indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup)
Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
backup nbr change
The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas.
Timers Kickoff: hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export
The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces.
The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces.
The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces.
The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired.
The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired.
The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer has been fired.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 153
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/l3/vrrp
VRRP Statistics
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the GbE Switch Module provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.
When virtual routers are configured, you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP:
Advertisements received ( vrrpInAdvers )
Advertisements transmitted ( vrrpOutAdvers )
Advertisements received, but ignored ( vrrpBadAdvers )
The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed:
VRRP statistics: vrrpInAdvers: 0 vrrpBadAdvers: 0 vrrpOutAdvers: 0 vrrpBadVersion: 0 vrrpBadVrid: 0 vrrpBadAddress: 0 vrrpBadData: 0 vrrpBadPassword: 0 vrrpBadInterval: 0
Table 5-24 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp)
Statistics vrrpInAdvers vrrpBadAdvers vrrpOutAdvers vrrpBadVersion vrrpBadVrid vrrpBadAddress vrrpBadData vrrpBadPassword
Description
The total number of valid VRRP advertisements that have been received.
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped.
The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent.
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad version number.
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad virtual router ID.
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad address.
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had bad data.
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad password.
154 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-24 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp)
Statistics vrrpBadInterval
Description
The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad interval.
/stats/l3/rip
Routing Information Protocol Statistics
RIP ALL STATS INFORMATION:
RIP packets received = 12
RIP packets sent = 75
RIP request received = 0
RIP response recevied = 12
RIP request sent = 3
RIP reponse sent = 72
RIP route timeout = 0
RIP bad size packet received = 0
RIP bad version received = 0
RIP bad zeros received = 0
RIP bad src port received = 0
RIP bad src IP received = 0
RIP packets from self received = 0
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 155
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/mp
Management Processor Statistics
[MP-specific Statistics Menu]
pkt - Show Packet stats
tcb - Show All TCP control blocks in use
ucb - Show All UDP control blocks in use
cpu - Show CPU utilization
Table 5-25 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp)
Command Syntax and Usage pkt
Displays packet statistics, to check for leads and load. To view a sample output and a description of
.
tcb
Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output and a description of the
.
ucb
Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output, see
cpu
Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1, 4, and 64 seconds. To view a sample output and a description of the stats, see
.
156 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/mp/pkt
MP Packet Statistics
Packet counts:
allocs: 1722684 frees: 1722684
mediums: 0 mediums hi-watermark: 4
jumbos: 0 jumbos hi-watermark: 0
smalls: 0 smalls hi-watermark: 8
failures: 0
Table 5-26 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt)
Statistics Description allocs frees mediums mediums hi-watermark
Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the
TCP/IP protocol stack.
Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.
Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.
The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.
jumbos Total number of packet allocations with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.
jumbos hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. smalls Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.
smalls hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.
failures Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 157
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/mp/tcb
TCP Statistics
All TCP allocated control blocks:
10ad41e8: 0.0.0.0 0 <=> 0.0.0.0 80 listen
10ad5790: 47.81.27.5 1171 <=> 47.80.23.243 23 established
Table 5-27 MP Specified TCP Statistics (/stats/mp/tcb)
Statistics
10ad41e8/10ad5790
0.0.0.0/47.81.27.5
0/1171
0.0.0.0/47.80.23.243
80/23 listen/established
Description
Memory
Destination IP address
Destination port
Source IP
Source port
State
/stats/mp/ucb
UCB Statistics
All UDP allocated control blocks:
161: listen
158 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/mp/cpu
CPU Statistics
This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics.
CPU utilization: cpuUtil1Second: 53% cpuUtil4Seconds: 54% cpuUtil64Seconds: 54%
Table 5-28 CPU Statistics (stats/mp/cpu)
Statistics cpuUtil1Second cpuUtil4Seconds
Description
The utilization of MP CPU over 1 second. It shows the percentage.
The utilization of MP CPU over 4 seconds. It shows the percentage.
cpuUtil64Seconds The utilization of MP CPU over 64 seconds. It shows the percentage.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 159
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/acl
ACL Statistics
acl - Display ACL stats
meter - Display ACL metering stats
dump - Display all available ACL stats
clracl - Clear ACL stats
clrmeter - Clear ACL metering stats
ACL statistics are described in the following table.
Table 5-29 ACL Statistics Menu Options (/stats/acl)
Command Syntax and Usage acl <1-4096>
Displays the Access Control List Statistics for a specific ACL. For details, see
meter <1-127>
Displays statistics for a specific ACL Meter. For details, see page 161
.
dump
Displays all ACL statistics. clracl
Clears all ACL statistics. clrmeter
Clears all ACL metering statistics.
/stats/acl/acl <ACL number>
ACL Statistics
This option displays ACL statistics.
Hits for ACL 1, port EXT1: 26057515
Hits for ACL 2, port EXT1: 26057497
160 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
/stats/acl/meter <meter number>
ACL Meter Statistics
This option displays ACL meter statistics.
Out of profile hits for Meter 1, Port EXT1: 0
Out of profile hits for Meter 2, Port EXT1: 0
Alteon OS Command Reference
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 161
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/snmp
SNMP Statistics
N OTE – You can reset the SNMP counter to zero by using clear command, as follows:
>> Statistics# snmp clear
SNMP statistics: snmpInPkts: 150097 snmpInBadVersions: 0 snmpInBadC'tyNames: 0 snmpInBadC'tyUses: 0 snmpInASNParseErrs: 0 snmpEnableAuthTraps: 0 snmpOutPkts: 150097 snmpInBadTypes: 0 snmpInTooBigs: 0 snmpInNoSuchNames: 0 snmpInBadValues: 0 snmpInReadOnlys: 0 snmpInGenErrs: 0 snmpInTotalReqVars: 798464 snmpInTotalSetVars: 2731 snmpInGetRequests: 17593 snmpInGetNexts: 131389 snmpInSetRequests: 615 snmpInGetResponses: 0 snmpInTraps: 0 snmpOutTooBigs: 0 snmpOutNoSuchNames: 1 snmpOutBadValues: 0 snmpOutReadOnlys: 0 snmpOutGenErrs: 1 snmpOutGetRequests: 0 snmpOutGetNexts: 0 snmpOutSetRequests: 0 snmpOutGetResponses: 150093 snmpOutTraps: 4 snmpSilentDrops: 0 snmpProxyDrops: 0
Table 5-30 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp)
Statistics snmpInPkts snmpInBadC'tyUses
Description
The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport service.
snmpInBadVersions The total number of SNMP Messages, which were delivered to the
SNMP protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version.
snmpInBadC'tyNames The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP entity which used an SNMP community name not known to the said entity (the switch).
The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the Message.
162 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-30 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp)
Statistics Description snmpInASNParseErrs The total number of ASN.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when decoding SNMP Messages received.
Note: OSI's method of specifying abstract objects is called ASN.1
(Abstract Syntax Notation One, defined in X.208), and one set of rules for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the
BER (Basic Encoding Rules, defined in X.209). ASN.1 is a flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of data types, from simple types such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and sequences. BER describes how to represent or encode values of each
ASN.1 type as a string of eight-bit octets.
snmpEnableAuth
Traps snmpOutPkts snmpInBadTypes
An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this entity (the switch).
The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport service.
The total number of SNMP Messages which failed ASN parsing.
snmpInTooBigs snmpInNoSuchNames snmpInBadValues snmpInReadOnlys snmpInGenErrs
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is too big.
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is noSuchName.
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue.
The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is `read-Only'. It should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU, which contains the value `read-Only' in the error-status field. As such, this object is provided as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP.
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr.
snmpInTotalReqVars The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Get-
Request and Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs).
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 163
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-30 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp)
Statistics Description snmpInTotalSetVars The total number of MIB objects, which have been altered successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Set-
Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs).
snmpInGetRequests snmpInGetNexts
The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpInSetRequests The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpInGetResponses The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpInTraps snmpOutTooBigs
The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is too big.
snmpOutNoSuchNames The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus is noSuchName.
snmpOutBadValues The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is badValue.
snmpOutReadOnlys snmpOutGenErrs
Not in use.
The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is genErr.
snmpOutGetRequests The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpOutGetNexts The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpOutSetRequests The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.
snmpOutGet
Responses
The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.
164 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-30 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp)
Statistics snmpOutTraps snmpSilentDrops snmpProxyDrops
Description
The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs), which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs, GetNextRequest-PDUs,
GetBulkRequest -PDUs, SetRequest-PDUs, and InformRequest -PDUs delivered to the SNMPv2 entity which were silently dropped because the size of a reply containing an alternate Response-
PDU with an empty variable bindings field was greater than either a local constraint or the maximum message size associated with the originator of the request.
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs, GetNextRequest-PDUs,
GetBulkRequest -PDUs, SetRequest-PDUs, and InformRequest -PDUs delivered to the SNMP entity which were silently dropped because the transmission of the message to a proxy target failed in a manner such that no Response-PDU could be returned.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 165
Alteon OS Command Reference
/stats/ntp
NTP Statistics
Alteon OS uses NTP (Network Timing Protocol) version 3 to synchronize the switch’s internal clock with an atomic time calibrated NTP server. With NTP enabled, the switch can accurately update its internal clock to be consistent with other devices on the network and generates accurate syslogs.
NTP statistics:
Primary Server:
Requests Sent: 17
Responses Received: 17
Updates: 1
Secondary Server:
Requests Sent: 0
Responses Received: 0
Updates: 0
Last update based on response from primary server.
Last update time: 18:04:16 Tue Mar 13, 2007
Current system time: 18:55:49 Tue Mar 13, 2007
Field
Table 5-31 NTP Statistics Parameters (/stats/ntp)
Description
Primary Server Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the primary NTP server to synchronize time.
Secondary Server
Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the primary NTP server.
Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the primary NTP server.
Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the secondary NTP server to synchronize time.
Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server.
Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server.
Last update based on response from primary server
Last update of time on the switch based on either primary or secondary
NTP response received.
166 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 5-31 NTP Statistics Parameters (/stats/ntp)
Field
Last update time
Current system time
Description
The time stamp showing the time when the switch was last updated.
The switch system time when the command /stats/ntp was issued.
N OTE – You can issue /stats/ntp/clear command to delete all statistics.
/stats/dump
Statistics Dump
Use the dump command to d ump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more, depending on your configuration). This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance.
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 167
Alteon OS Command Reference
168 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 40M2420, April 2007
C HAPTER 6
The Configuration Menu
This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making, viewing, and saving switch configuration changes. Many of the commands, although not new, display more or different information than in the previous version. Important differences are called out in the text.
40M2420, April 2007 169
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg
Configuration Menu
[Configuration Menu]
sys - System-wide Parameter Menu
port - Port Menu
l2 - Layer 2 Menu
l3 - Layer 3 Menu
qos - QOS Menu
acl - Access Control List Menu
pmirr - Port Mirroring Menu
setup - Step by step configuration set up
dump - Dump current configuration to script file
ptcfg - Backup current configuration to FTP/TFTP server
gtcfg - Restore current configuration from FTP/TFTP server
cur - Display current configuration
Each configuration option is briefly described in Table 6-1
, with pointers to detailed menu commands.
Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg)
Command Syntax and Usage sys
Displays the System Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see
.
port <port alias or number>
Displays the Port Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see
l2
Displays the Layer 2 Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 217 .
l3
Displays the Layer 3 Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 252 .
qos
Displays the Quality of Service Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 307
. acl
Displays the ACL Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 310
. pmirr
Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see
setup
Step-by-step configuration set-up of the switch. For details, see
170 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg)
Command Syntax and Usage dump
Dumps current configuration to a script file. For details, see
ptcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host>
Backs up current configuration to TFTP server. For details, see page 321
.
gtcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host>
Restores current configuration from TFTP server. For details, see page 321
.
cur
Displays current configuration parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 171
Alteon OS Command Reference
Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes
As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters, the changes you make do not take effect immediately. All changes are considered “pending” until you explicitly apply them.
Also, any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved.
N OTE – Some operations can override the settings in the Configuration menu. Therefore, settings you view in the Configuration menu (for example, port status) might differ from run-time information that you view in the Information menu or on the management module. The Information menu displays current run-time information of switch parameters.
While configuration changes are in the pending state, you can do the following:
View the pending changes
Apply the pending changes
Save the changes to flash memory
Viewing Pending Changes
You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at the menu prompt.
N OTE – The diff command is a global command. Therefore, you can enter diff at any prompt in the CLI.
Applying Pending Changes
To make your configuration changes active, you must apply them. To apply configuration changes, enter apply at any prompt in the CLI.
# apply
N OTE – The apply command is a global command. Therefore, you can enter apply at any prompt in the administrative interface.
172 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Saving the Configuration
In addition to applying the configuration changes, you can save them to flash memory on the
GbE Switch Module .
N OTE – If you do not save the changes, they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted.
To save the new configuration, enter the following command at any CLI prompt:
# save
When you save configuration changes, the changes are saved to the active configuration block.
The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block.
If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block, enter the following instead:
# save n
You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch. Your options include:
The active configuration block
The backup configuration block
Factory default configuration
You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory using the diff flash command. It is a global command that can be executed from any menu.
For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset, see
Configuration Block” on page 336
.
Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 173
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys
System Configuration
[System Menu]
syslog - Syslog Menu
sshd - SSH Server Menu
radius - RADIUS Authentication Menu
tacacs+ - TACACS+ Authentication Menu
ldap - LDAP Authentication Menu
ntp - NTP Server Menu
ssnmp - System SNMP Menu
access - System Access Menu
date - Set system date
time - Set system time
timezone - Set system timezone (daylight savings)
olddst - Set system DST for US
idle - Set timeout for idle CLI sessions
notice - Set login notice
e2e - Enable/disable end-to-end flow control mode
hgibp - Enable/disable higig IBP
bannr - Set login banner
hprompt - Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt
reminders - Enable/disable Reminders
cur - Display current system-wide parameters
This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator privilege mode passwords, Web-based management settings, and management access lists.
Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage syslog
Displays the Syslog Menu. To view menu options, see
.
sshd
Displays the SSH Server Menu. To view menu options, see
radius
Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu. To view menu options, see page 179 .
tacacs+
Displays the TACACS+ Authentication Menu. To view menu options, see page 181 .
ldap
Displays the LDAP Authentication Menu. To view menu options, see page 184
.
174 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage ntp
Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu.
To view menu options, see page 186
. ssnmp
Displays the System SNMP Menu. To view menu options, see page 188
. access
Displays the System Access Menu. To view menu options, see
date
Prompts the user for the system date. The date reverts to its default value when the switch is reset. time
Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format. The time reverts to its default value when the switch is reset. timezone
Configures the time zone where the switch resides. You are prompted to select your location (continent, country, region) by the timezone wizard. Once a region is selected, the switch updates the time to reflect local changes to Daylight Savings Time, etc. olddst enable|disable
Enables or disables use of the Daylight Saving Time (DST) rules in effect prior to the year 2007.
The default value is disabled. idle <idle timeout in minutes>
Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions, from 1 to 60 minutes. The default is 5 minutes.
notice <max 1024 char multi-line login notice> <'-' to end>
Displays login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new lines.
e2e enable|disable
Enables or disables End-to-End flow control mode. The default value is enabled. If you change the flow-control mode, you must apply and save the changes, then reboot the switch before the change takes effect.
The GbE switch module has two switching chips connected by an internal high-capacity link
(Higig). Over subscription of traffic across the Higig link is handled by one of the following flow control modes:
End-to-End (E2E) Flow Control
Ingress Back Pressure (IBP) across the Higig link
One of the modes should be enabled, and the other mode disabled. E2E flow control works best for most applications. E2E provides a higher throughput and better overall switch performance, but does not provide lossless flow control.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 175
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage hgibp enable|disable
Enables or disables Higig Ingress Back Pressure (IBP) flow control mode. The default value is disabled . If you change the flow-control mode, you must apply and save the changes, then reboot the switch before the change takes effect.
The GbE switch module has two switching chips connected by an internal high-capacity link
(Higig). Over subscription of traffic across the Higig link is handled by one of the following flow control modes:
End-to-End (E2E) Flow Control
Ingress Back Pressure (IBP) across the Higig link
One of the modes should be enabled, and the other mode disabled. Applications that cannot tolerate packet loss might require IBP across the Higig link. Higig IPB achieves lossless operation, but it might result in a lower throughput. bannr <string, maximum 80 characters>
Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. When a user or administrator logs into the switch, the login banner is displayed. It is also displayed as part of the output from the /info/sys command.
hprompt disable|enable
Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command
Line Interface (CLI).
reminders disable|enable
Enables or disables reminder messages in the CLI. The default value is enabled.
cur
Displays the current system parameters.
176 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/syslog
System Host Log Configuration
[Syslog Menu]
host - Set IP address of first syslog host
host2 - Set IP address of second syslog host
sever - Set the severity of first syslog host
sever2 - Set the severity of second syslog host
facil - Set facility of first syslog host
facil2 - Set facility of second syslog host
console - Enable/disable console output of syslog messages
log - Enable/disable syslogging of features
cur - Display current syslog settings
Table 6-3 Host Log Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog)
Command Syntax and Usage host <new syslog host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.223)>
Sets the IP address of the first syslog host.
host2 <new syslog host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.223)>
Sets the IP address of the second syslog host.
sever <syslog host local severity (0–7)>
This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed. The default is 7, which means log all severity levels.
sever2 <syslog host local severity (0–7)>
This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed. The default is 7, which means, log all severity levels.
facil <syslog host local facility (0-7)>
This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed. The default is 0.
facil2 <syslog host local facility (0-7)>
This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed. The default is 0.
console disable|enable
Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. When necessary, disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages. It is enabled by default.
log <feature|all> <enable|disable>
Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated. You can choose to enable/ disable specific features (such as vlans, stg, or servers), or enable/disable syslog on all available features.
cur
Displays the current syslog settings.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 177
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/sshd
SSH Server Configuration
[SSHD Menu]
intrval - Set Interval for generating the RSA server key
scpadm - Set SCP-only admin password
hkeygen - Generate the RSA host key
skeygen - Generate the RSA server key
sshport - Set SSH server port number
ena - Enable the SCP apply and save
dis - Disable the SCP apply and save
on - Turn SSH server ON
off - Turn SSH server OFF
cur - Display current SSH server configuration
For the GbE Switch Module , this menu enables Secure Shell access from any SSH client. SSH scripts can be viewed by using the /cfg/dump command (see
).
N OTE – Only the following commands are accessible through a serial connection: ena , on, off, cur
Table 6-4 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd)
Command Syntax and Usage intrval <0 - 24>
Set the interval for auto-generation of the RSA server key. scpadm
Set the administration password for SCP access. hkeygen
Generate the RSA host key. skeygen
Generate the RSA server key. sshport <TCP port number>
Sets the SSH server port number.
ena
Enables the SCP apply and save.
dis
Disables the SCP apply and save.
on
Enables the SSH server.
178 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-4 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd)
Command Syntax and Usage off
Disables the SSH server.
cur
Displays the current SSH server configuration.
/cfg/sys/radius
RADIUS Server Configuration
[RADIUS Server Menu]
prisrv - Set primary RADIUS server address
secsrv - Set secondary RADIUS server address
secret - Set RADIUS secret
secret2 - Set secondary RADIUS server secret
port - Set RADIUS port
retries - Set RADIUS server retries
timeout - Set RADIUS server timeout
bckdoor - Enable/disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet/ssh/http/https
on - Turn RADIUS authentication ON
off - Turn RADIUS authentication OFF
cur - Display current RADIUS configuration
Table 6-5 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius)
Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address>
Sets the primary RADIUS server address.
secsrv <IP address>
Sets the secondary RADIUS server address.
secret <1-32 character secret>
This is the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s).
secret2 <1-32 character secret>
This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s).
port <RADIUS port configure, default 1645>
Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured, between 1500 - 3000. The default is 1645.
retries <RADIUS server retries (1-3)>
Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server.
The default is 3 requests.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 179
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-5 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius)
Command Syntax and Usage timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds (1-10)>
Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. The default is 3 seconds.
bckdoor disable |enable
Enables or disables the RADIUS backdoor for telnet. The bckdoor command also applies to
SSH/SCP connections and the Browser-Based Interface (BBI). The default setting is disabled.
To obtain the RADIUS backdoor password for your GbESM, contact your IBM Service and
Support line. on
Enables the RADIUS server.
off
Disables the RADIUS server.
cur
Displays the current RADIUS server parameters.
180 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/tacacs+
TACACS+ Server Configuration
TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control system) is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system. TACACS is an encryption protocol, and therefore less secure than TACACS+ and Remote Authentication
Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) protocols. (Both TACACS and TACACS+ are described in
RFC 1492.)
TACACS+ protocol is more reliable than RADIUS, as TACACS+ uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Also,
RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a user profile, whereas TACACS+ separates the two operations.
TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device:
TACACS+ is TCP-based, so it facilitates connection-oriented traffic.
It supports full-packet encryption, as opposed to password-only in authentication requests.
It supports de-coupled authentication, authorization, and accounting.
[TACACS+ Server Menu]
prisrv - Set IP address of primary TACACS+ server
secsrv - Set IP address of secondary TACACS+ server
secret - Set secret for primary TACACS+ server
secret2 - Set secret for secondary TACACS+ server
port - Set TACACS+ port number
retries - Set number of TACACS+ server retries
timeout - Set timeout value of TACACS+ server retries
bckdoor - Enable/disable TACACS+ backdoor for telnet/ssh/
http/hhtps
secbd - Enable/disable TACACS+ secure backdoor for telnet/
ssh/http
cmap - Enable/disable TACACS+ new privilege level mapping
passch - Enable/disable TACACS+ password change
chpass_p - Set new password for primary server
chpass_s - Set new password for secondary server
cauth - Enable/disable TACACS+ command authorization
clog - Enable/disable TACACS+ command logging
on - Enable TACACS+ authentication
off - Disable TACACS+ authentication
cur - Display current TACACS+ settings
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 181
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-6 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs)
Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address>
Defines the primary TACACS+ server address.
secsrv <IP address>
Defines the secondary TACACS+ server address.
secret <1-32 character secret>
This is the shared secret between the switch and the TACACS+ server(s).
secret2 <1-32 character secret>
This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the TACACS+ server(s).
port <TACACS port configure, default 49>
Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured, between 1 - 65000. The default is 49.
retries < TACACS server retries, 1-3>
Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different TACACS+ server.
The default is 3 requests. timeout <TACACS server timeout seconds, 4-15>
Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a TACACS+ server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. The default is 5 seconds.
bckdoor disable|enable
Enables or disables the TACACS+ back door for telnet. The telnet command also applies to
SSH/SCP connections, and the Browser-Based Interface (BBI). The default is disabled.
To obtain the TACACS+ backdoor password for your GbESM, contact your IBM Service and
Support line. secbd enable|disable
Enables or disables TACACS+ secure backdoor access through telnet, SSH, and the Browser-
Based Interface (BBI). cmap enable|disable
Enables or disables TACACS+ privilege-level mapping.
The default value is disabled. passch enable|disable
Enables or disables TACACS+ password change.
The default value is disabled. chpass_p
Configures the password for the primary TACACS+ server. The CLI will prompt you for input. chpass_s
Configures the password for the secondary TACACS+ server. The CLI will prompt you for input.
182 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-6 TACACS+ Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/tacacs)
Command Syntax and Usage
cauth disable|enable
Enables or disables TACACS+ command authorization.
clog disable|enable
Enables or disables TACACS+ command logging. on
Enables the TACACS+ server. This is the default setting. off
Disables the TACACS+ server.
cur
Displays current TACACS+ configuration parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 183
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/ldap
LDAP Server Configuration
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user's logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system.
[LDAP Server Menu]
prisrv - Set IP address of primary LDAP server
secsrv - Set IP address of secondary LDAP server
port - Set LDAP port number
retries - Set number of LDAP server retries
timeout - Set timeout value of LDAP server retries
domain - Set domain name
telnet - Enable/disable LDAP backdoor for telnet/ssh/http
on - Enable LDAP authentication
off - Disable LDAP authentication
cur - Display current LDAP settings
Table 6-7 LDAP Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ldap)
Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address>
Defines the primary LDAP server address.
secsrv <IP address>
Defines the secondary LDAP server address.
port <LDAP port configure, default 389>
Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured, between 1 - 65000. The default is 389.
retries < LDAP server retries, 1-3>
Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different LDAP server. The default is 3 requests. timeout <LDAP server timeout seconds, 4-15>
Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a LDAP server authentication attempt is considered to have failed. The default is 5 seconds.
domain <domain name (1-128 characters)>|none
Sets the domain name for the LDAP server. Enter the full path for your organization. For example: ou=people,dc=mydomain,dc=com
184 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-7 LDAP Server Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ldap)
Command Syntax and Usage
telnet disable|enable
Enables or disables the LDAP back door for telnet. The telnet command also applies to
SSH/SCP connections, and the Browser-Based Interface (BBI). The default is disabled.
To obtain the LDAP backdoor password for your GbESM, contact your IBM Service and
Support line. on
Enables the LDAP server. off
Disables the LDAP server. This is the default setting. cur
Displays current LDAP configuration parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 185
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/ntp
NTP Server Configuration
[NTP Server Menu]
prisrv - Set primary NTP server address
secsrv - Set secondary NTP server address
intrval - Set NTP server resync interval
tzone - Set NTP timezone offset from GMT
dlight - Enable or disable NTP daylight savings time
on - Turn NTP service ON
off - Turn NTP service OFF
cur - Display current NTP configuration
This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. By default, this option is disabled.
Table 6-8 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp)
Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <NTP Server IP address>
Prompts for the IP addresses of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock.
secsrv <NTP Server IP address>
Prompts for the IP addresses of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock.
intrval <resync interval in minutes>
Specifies the interval, that is, how often, in minutes (1-2880), to re-synchronize the switch clock with the NTP server.
tzone <time zone offset, in HH:MM>
Prompts for the NTP time zone offset, in hours and minutes, of the switch you are synchronizing from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
dlight disable|enable
Disables or enables daylight savings time in the system clock. When enabled, the switch will add an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent with the local clock. By default, this option is disabled.
on
Enables the NTP synchronization service.
186 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-8 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp)
Command Syntax and Usage off
Disables the NTP synchronization service.
cur
Displays the current NTP service settings.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 187
Alteon OS Command Reference
cfg/sys/ssnmp
System SNMP Configuration
[System SNMP Menu]
snmpv3 - SNMPv3 Menu
name - Set SNMP "sysName"
locn - Set SNMP "sysLocation"
cont - Set SNMP "sysContact"
rcomm - Set SNMP read community string
wcomm - Set SNMP write community string
trsrc - Set SNMP trap source interface
timeout - Set timeout for the SNMP state machine
auth - Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap"
linkt - Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap
cur - Display current SNMP configuration
Alteon OS supports SNMP-based network management. In SNMP model of network management, a management station (client/manager) accesses a set of variables known as MIBs (Management Information Base) provided by the managed device (agent). If you are running an
SNMP network management station on your network, you can manage the switch using the following standard SNMP MIBs:
MIB II (RFC 1213)
Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643)
Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)
An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP port 161 for
SNMP messages. Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list of management objects to retrieve or to modify.
SNMP parameters that can be modified include:
System name
System location
System contact
Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function
Read community string
Write community string
Trap community strings
188 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-9 System SNMP Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp)
Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3
Displays SNMPv3 menu. To view menu options, see page 190
. name <new string, maximum 64 characters>
Configures the name for the system. The name can have a maximum of 64 characters.
locn <new string, maximum 64 characters>
Configures the name of the system location. The location can have a maximum of 64 characters.
cont <new string, maximum 64 characters>
Configures the name of the system contact. The contact can have a maximum of 64 characters.
rcomm <new SNMP read community string, maximum 32 characters>
Configures the SNMP read community string. The read community string controls SNMP “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default read community string is
public.
wcomm <new SNMP write community string, maximum 32 characters>
Configures the SNMP write community string. The write community string controls SNMP “set” and “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default write community string is private.
trsrc <1-128>
Configures the source interface for SNMP traps. timeout <1-30>
Set the timeout value for the SNMP state machine, in minutes.
auth disable|enable
Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. The default setting is disabled.
linkt <port> [disable|enable]
Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps. The default setting is enabled.
cur
Displays the current SNMP configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 189
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3
SNMPv3 Configuration
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2
Framework by supporting the following:
a new SNMP message format
security for messages
access control
remote configuration of SNMP parameters
For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276.
[SNMPv3 Menu]
usm - usmUser Table menu
view - vacmViewTreeFamily Table menu
access - vacmAccess Table menu
group - vacmSecurityToGroup Table menu
comm - community Table menu
taddr - targetAddr Table menu
tparam - targetParams Table menu
notify - notify Table menu
v1v2 - Enable/disable V1/V2 access
cur - Display current SNMPv3 configuration
Table 6-10 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3)
Command Syntax and Usage usm <usmUser number [1-16]>
This command allows you to create a user security model (USM) entry for an authorized user. You can also configure this entry through SNMP. To view menu options, see
view <vacmViewTreeFamily number [1-128]>
This command allows you to create different MIB views. To view menu options, see page 193
. access <vacmAccess number [1-32]>
This command allows you to specify access rights. The View-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user.
You need access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. To view menu options, see
. group <vacmSecurityToGroup number [1-16]>
A group maps the user name to the access group names and their access rights needed to access SNMP management objects. A group defines the access rights assigned to all
names that belong to a particular group. To view menu options, see page 196
.
190 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-10 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3) comm <snmpCommunity number [1-16]>
The community table contains objects for mapping community strings and version-independent
SNMP message parameters. To view menu options, see page 197
.
taddr <snmpTargetAddr number [1-16]>
This command allows you to configure destination information, consisting of a transport domain and a transport address. This is also termed as transport endpoint. The SNMP MIB provides a mechanism for performing source address validation on incoming requests, and for selecting community strings based on target addresses for outgoing notifications. To view menu options, see
tparam <target params index [1-16]>
This command allows you to configure SNMP parameters, consisting of message processing model, security model, security level, and security name information. There may be multiple transport endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters, or a particular transport endpoint may be associated with several sets of SNMP parameters. To view menu options, see
notify <notify index [1-16]>
A notification application typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions, and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions. To view menu options, see
v1v2 disable|enable
This command allows you to enable or disable the access to SNMP version 1 and version 2. This command is enabled by default.
cur
Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 191
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm
User Security Model Configuration
You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model. An SNMP engine must have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user.
This menu helps you create a user security model entry for an authorized user. You need to provide a security name to create the USM entry.
[SNMPv3 usmUser 1 Menu]
name - Set USM user name
auth - Set authentication protocol
authpw - Set authentication password
priv - Set privacy protocol
privpw - Set privacy password
del - Delete usmUser entry
cur - Display current usmUser configuration
Table 6-11 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm)
Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name>
This command allows you to configure a string up to 32 characters long that represents the name of the user. This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch.
auth md5|sha|none
This command allows you to configure the authentication protocol between HMAC-MD5-96 or
HMAC-SHA-96. The default algorithm is none.
authpw
If you selected an authentication algorithm using the above command, you need to provide a password, otherwise you will get an error message during validation. This command allows you to create or change your password for authentication.
priv des|none
This command allows you to configure the type of privacy protocol on your switch. The privacy protocol protects messages from disclosure. The options are des (CBC-DES Symmetric Encryption Protocol) or none. If you specify des as the privacy protocol, then make sure that you have selected one of the authentication protocols (MD5 or HMAC-SHA-96). If you select none as the authentication protocol, you will get an error message.
privpw
This command allows you to create or change the privacy password.
192 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-11 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/usm)
Command Syntax and Usage del
Deletes the USM user entries.
cur
Displays the USM user entries.
cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view
SNMPv3 View Configuration
[SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamily 1 Menu]
name - Set view name
tree - Set MIB subtree(OID) which defines a family of view subtrees
mask - Set view mask
type - Set view type
del - Delete vacmViewTreeFamily entry
cur - Display current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration
Table 6-12 SNMPv3 View Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/view)
Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name>
This command defines the name for a family of view subtrees up to a maximum of 32 characters. tree <object identifier, such as,. 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1.0, max 32 characters>
This command defines MIB tree, a string of maximum 32 characters, which when combined with the corresponding mask defines a family of view subtrees.
mask <bitmask, max size 32 characters>
This command defines the bit mask, which in combination with the corresponding tree defines a family of view subtrees.
type included|excluded
This command indicates whether the corresponding instances of vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMask define a family of view subtrees, which is included in or excluded from the MIB view.
del
Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamily group entry.
cur
Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 193
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access
View-based Access Control Model Configuration
The view-based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user. Access control is needed when the user has to process
SNMP retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity.
[SNMPv3 vacmAccess 1 Menu]
name - Set group name
prefix - Set content prefix
model - Set security model
level - Set minimum level of security
match - Set prefix only or exact match
rview - Set read view index
wview - Set write view index
nview - Set notify view index
del - Delete vacmAccess entry
cur - Display current vacmAccess configuration
Table 6-13 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access)
Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name>
Defines the name of the group.
prefix <32 character name>
Defines the name of the context. An SNMP context is a collection of management information that an SNMP entity can access. An SNMP entity has access to many contexts. For more information on naming the management information, see RFC2571, the SNMP Architecture document. The view-based Access Control Model defines a table that lists the locally available contexts by contextName.
model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2
Allows you to select the security model to be used.
level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv
Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights. The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol.
match exact|prefix
If the value is set to exact, then all the rows whose contextName exactly matches the prefix are selected. If the value is set to prefix then the all the rows where the starting octets of the contextName exactly match the prefix are selected.
194 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-13 View-based Access Control Model Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/ snmpv3/access)
Command Syntax and Usage rview <32 character view name>
This is a 32 character long read view name that allows you read access to a particular MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted.
wview <32 character view name>
This is a 32 character long write view name that allows you write access to the MIB view. If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted.
nview <32 character view name>
This is a 32 character long notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB view. del
Deletes the View-based Access Control entry.
cur
Displays the View-based Access Control configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 195
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group
SNMPv3 Group Configuration
[SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 1 Menu]
model - Set security model
uname - Set USM user name
gname - Set group gname
del - Delete vacmSecurityToGroup entry
cur - Display current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration
Table 6-14 SNMPv3 Group Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/group)
Command Syntax and Usage
model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2
Defines the security model.
uname <32 character name>
Sets the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 192
. gname <32 character name>
The name for the access group as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/access/name on
. del
Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroup entry.
cur
Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration.
196 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/comm
SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration
This command is used for configuring the community table entry. The configured entry is stored in the community table list in the SNMP engine. This table is used to configure community strings in the Local Configuration Datastore (LCD) of SNMP engine.
[SNMPv3 snmpCommunityTable 1 Menu]
index - Set community index
name - Set community string
uname - Set USM user name
tag - Set community tag
del - Delete communityTable entry
cur - Display current communityTable configuration
Table 6-15 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/comm)
Command Syntax and Usage index <32 character name>
Allows you to configure the unique index value of a row in this table consisting of 32 characters maximum.
name <32 character name>
Defines the user name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/usm/name on page 192
.
uname <32 character name>
Defines a readable 32 character long string that represents the corresponding value of an SNMP community name in a security model.
tag <list of tag string, max 255 characters>
Allows you to configure a tag of up to 255 characters maximum. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap.
del
Deletes the community table entry.
cur
Displays the community table configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 197
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration
This command is used to configure the target transport entry. The configured entry is stored in the target address table list in the SNMP engine. This table of transport addresses is used in the generation of SNMP messages.
[SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddrTable 1 Menu]
name - Set target address name
addr - Set target transport address IP
port - Set target transport address port
taglist - Set tag list
pname - Set targetParams name
del - Delete targetAddrTable entry
cur - Display current targetAddrTable configuration
Table 6-16 Target Address Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/taddr)
Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name>
Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier, target address name associated with this entry.
addr <transport address ip>
Allows you to configure a transport address IP that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps.
port <transport address port>
Allows you to configure a transport address port that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps.
taglist <list of tag string, max 255 characters>
Allows you to configure a list of tags that are used to select target addresses for a particular operation.
pname <32 character name>
Defines the name as defined in /cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam/name on page 199
.
del
Deletes the Target Address Table entry.
cur
Displays the current Target Address Table configuration.
198 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration
You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the
SNMP engine. This table contains parameters that are used to generate a message. The parameters include the message processing model (for example: SNMPv3, SNMPv2c, SNMPv1), the security model (for example: USM), the security name, and the security level (noAuthno-
Priv, authNoPriv, or authPriv).
[SNMPv3 snmpTargetParamsTable 1 Menu]
name - Set target params name
mpmodel - Set message processing model
model - Set security model
uname - Set USM user name
level - Set minimum level of security
del - Delete targetParamsTable entry
cur - Display current targetParamsTable configuration
Table 6-17 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ ssnmp/snmpv3/tparam)
Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name>
Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier that is associated with this entry.
mpmodel snmpv1|snmpv2c|snmpv3
Allows you to configure the message processing model that is used to generate SNMP messages.
model usm|snmpv1|snmpv2
Allows you to select the security model to be used when generating the SNMP messages.
uname <32 character name>
Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table (
page 192 ) on whose behalf the SNMP
messages are generated using this entry.
level noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv
Allows you to select the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP messages using this entry. The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol.
del
Deletes the targetParamsTable entry.
cur
Displays the current targetParamsTable configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 199
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify
SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration
SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps. A notification typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions, and generates Notification-Class messages based on these events or conditions.
[SNMPv3 snmpNotifyTable 1 Menu]
name - Set notify name
tag - Set notify tag
del - Delete notifyTable entry
cur - Display current notifyTable configuration
Table 6-18 Notify Table Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp/snmpv3/notify)
Command Syntax and Usage name <32 character name>
Defines a locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this SNMP notify entry.
tag <list of tag string, max 255 characters>
Allows you to configure a tag of 255 characters maximum that contains a tag value which is used to select entries in the Target Address Table. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable, that matches the value of this tag, is selected.
del
Deletes the notify table entry.
cur
Displays the current notify table configuration.
200 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
cfg/sys/access
System Access Configuration
[System Access Menu]
mgmt - Management Network Definition Menu
user - User Access Control Menu (passwords)
http - Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access
https - HTTPS Web Access Menu
wport - Set HTTP (Web) server port number
snmp - Set SNMP access control
userbbi - Enable/disable user configuration from BBI
tsbbi - Enable/disable telnet/ssh configuration from BBI
tnet - Enable/disable Telnet access
tnport - Set Telnet server port number
tport - Set the TFTP port for the system
cur - Display current system access configuration
Table 6-19 System Access Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access)
Command Syntax and Usage mgmt
Displays the Management Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see
user
Displays the User Access Control Menu. To view menu options, see
http disable|enable
Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the Browser-Based Interface. It is enabled by default. https
Displays the HTTPS Menu. To view menu options, see
wport <TCP port number (1-65535)>
Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content. The default is HTTP port 80. If Global
Server Load Balancing is to be used, set this to a different port (such as 8080).
snmp disable|read-only|read-write
Disables or provides read-only/write-read SNMP access. userbbi enable|disable
Enables or disables user configuration access through the Browser-Based Interface (BBI). tsbbi enable|disable
Enables or disables Telnet/SSH configuration access through the Browser-Based Interface (BBI).
You see this command only if you are connected to the switch through a serial connection. tnet enable|disable
Enables or disables Telnet access. This command is enabled by default. You see this command only if you are connected to the switch through a serial connection.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 201
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-19 System Access Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access)
Command Syntax and Usage tnport <TCP port number>
Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a non-standard port.
tport <TFTP port number (1-65535)>
Sets the TFTP port for the switch. The default is port 69. cur
Displays the current system access parameters.
202 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/access/mgmt
Management Networks Configuration
[Management Networks Menu]
add - Add mgmt network definition
rem - Remove mgmt network definition
cur - Display current mgmt network definitions
clear - Clear current mgmt network definitions
This menu is used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for management purposes.
Table 6-20 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt)
Command Syntax and Usage add <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask>
Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed through Telnet, SNMP, RIP, or the
Alteon OS browser-based interface. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask address. Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted-decimal notation.
Note: If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces, it will cause the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and will create a “Network Down” state on the network. rem <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask>
Removes a defined network, which consists of a management network address and a management network mask address.
cur
Displays the current configuration.
clear
Clears the current management network definitions.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 203
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/access/user
User Access Control Configuration
[User Access Control Menu]
uid - User ID Menu
eject - Eject user
usrpw - Set user password (user)
opw - Set operator password (oper)
admpw - Set administrator password (admin)
strongpw - Strong password menu
cur - Display current user status
N OTE – User passwords can be a maximum of 15 characters.
Table 6-21 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user)
Command Syntax and Usage uid <User ID (1-10)>
Displays the User ID Menu. To view menu options, see page 205
.
eject user|oper|admin|<user name>
Ejects the specified user from the GbESM. usrpw
Sets the user (user) password. The user has no direct responsibility for switch management. He or she can view switch status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration changes.
The user password can have a maximum of 15 characters.
opw
Sets the operator (oper)password. The operator manages all functions of the switch. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports, except the management ports.
The operator password can have a maximum of 15 characters.
admpw
Sets the administrator (admin) password. The super user administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands on the GbE Switch Module, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords.
Access includes “oper” functions.
strongpw
Displays the Strong User Password Menu. To view menu options, see page 206 .
cur
Displays the current user status.
204 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/access/user/uid < 1-10>
System User ID Configuration
[User ID 1 Menu]
cos - Set class of service
name - Set user name
pswd - Set user password
ena - Enable user ID
dis - Disable user ID
del - Delete user ID
cur - Display current user configuration
Table 6-22 User ID Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/uid)
Command Syntax and Usage cos <user|oper|admin>
Sets the Class-of-Service to define the user’s authority level. Alteon OS defines these levels as:
User, Operator, and Administrator, with User being the most restricted level. name <1-8 characters>
Defines the user name of maximum eight characters.
pswd <1-15 characters>
Sets the user password of up to 15 characters maximum.
ena
Enables the user ID.
dis
Disables the user ID.
del
Deletes the user ID.
cur
Displays the current user ID configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 205
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/access/user/strongpw
Strong Password Configuration
[Strong Pwd Menu]
ena - Enable usage of strong passwords
dis - Disable usage of strong passwords
expiry - Set password validity
warning - Set warning days before pswd expiry
faillog - Set number of failed logins for security notification
cur - Display current strong password configuration
Table 6-23 Strong Password Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user/strongpw)
Command Syntax and Usage ena
Enables Strong Password requirement. dis
Disables Strong Password requirement.
expiry <1-365>
Configures the number of days allowed before the password must be changed.
warning <1-365>
Configures the number of days before password expiration, that a warning is issued to users.
faillog <1-255>
Configures the number of failed login attempts allowed before a security notification is logged. cur
Displays the current Strong Password configuration.
206 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/sys/access/https
HTTPS Access Configuration
[https Menu]
access - Enable/Disable HTTPS Web access
port - HTTPS WebServer port number
generate - Generate self-signed HTTPS server certificate
certSave - save HTTPS certificate
cur - Display current SSL Web Access configuration
Table 6-24 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/https)
Command Syntax and Usage access
Enables or disables BBI access (Web access) using HTTPS.
port <TCP port number>
Defines the HTTPS Web server port number.
generate
Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the key exchange. A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the first time. The user can create a new certificate defining the information that they want to be used in the various fields. For example:
Country Name (2 letter code) [ ]: CA
State or Province Name (full name) []: Ontario
Locality Name (for example, city) []: Ottawa
Organization Name (for example, company) []: Blade
Organizational Unit Name (for example, section) []: Alteon
Common Name (for example, user’s name) []: Mr Smith
Email (for example, email address) []: [email protected]
You will be asked to confirm if you want to generate the certificate. It will take approximately 30 seconds to generate the certificate. Then the switch will restart SSL agent.
certSave
Allows the client, or the Web browser, to accept the certificate and save the certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted. cur
Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 207
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/port <port alias or number>
Port Configuration
[Port INT1 Menu]
gig - Gig Phy Menu
aclqos - Acl/Qos Configuration Menu
8021ppri - Set default 802.1p priority
pvid - Set default port VLAN id
name - Set port name
dscpmrk - Enable/disable DSCP remarking for port
tag - Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port
tagpvid - Enable/disable tagging on pvid
fastfwd - Enable/disable Port Fast Forwarding mode
ena - Enable port
dis - Disable port
cur - Display current port configuration
Use the Port Configuration menu to configure settings for individual switch ports, except the management port (MGT). This command is enabled by default.
Table 6-25 Port Configuration Menu (/cfg/port)
Command Syntax and Usage gig
If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet, this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physi-
cal Link Menu. To view menu options, see page 210 .
aclqos
Displays the ACL Quality of Service Menu. To view menu options, see page 211
.
8021ppri <0-7>
Configures the port’s 802.1p priority level. pvid <VLAN number, 1-4095>
Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged.
The default number is 1 for non-management ports. name <64 character string>|none
Sets a name for the port. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. The default is set to None.
dscpmark
Enables or disables DSCP re-marking on a port.
tag disable|enable
Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. It is disabled by default.
208 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-25 Port Configuration Menu (/cfg/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
tagpvid disable|enable
Disables or enables VLAN tag persistence. When disabled, the VLAN tag is removed from packets whose VLAN tag matches the port PVID. The default value is disabled for INT and EXT ports, and enabled for MGT ports.
fastfwd disable|enable
Disables or enables Port Fast Forwarding, which permits a port that participates in Spanning
Tree to bypass the Listening and Learning states and enter directly into the Forwarding state.
While in the Forwarding state, the port listens to the BPDUs to learn if there is a loop and, if
dictated by normal STG behavior (following priorities, etc.), the port transitions into the Blocking state. This feature permits the GbESM to interoperate well within Rapid Spanning Tree networks. ena
Enables the port.
dis
Disables the port. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes, refer to
“Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 211 .)
cur
Displays current port parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 209
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/port <port alias or number> gig
Port Link Configuration
[Gigabit Link Menu]
speed - Set link speed
mode - Set full or half duplex mode
fctl - Set flow control
auto - Set auto negotiation
cur - Display current gig link configuration
Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link.
Link menu options are described in Table 6-26
and appear on the gig port configuration menu for the GbE Switch Module . Use this menu to set port parameters such as speed, flow control, and negotiation mode for the port link.
Table 6-26 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/gig)
Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any
Sets the link speed. Some options are not valid on all ports. The choices include:
10 Mbps
100 Mbps
1000 Mbps
“Auto,” for auto negotiation
mode full|half|any
Sets the operating mode. The choices include:
“Any,” for auto negotiation (default)
Full-duplex
Half-duplex
fctl rx|tx|both|none
Sets the flow control. The choices include:
Receive flow control
Transmit flow control
Both receive and transmit flow control (default)
No flow control
auto on|off
Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port.
cur
Displays current port parameters.
210 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Temporarily Disabling a Port
To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes, enter the following command at any prompt:
Main# /oper/port <port alias or number>/dis
Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port, you do not need to use apply or save . The port state will revert to its original configuration when the GbE Switch Module is
reset. See the “Operations Menu” on page 324
for other operations-level commands.
/cfg/port <port alias or number> aclqos
Port ACL Configuration
[Port INT2 ACL Menu]
meter - ACL Metering Configuration Menu
re-mark - ACL Re-mark Configuration Menu
add - Add ACL, ACL block or ACL group to this port
rem - Remove ACL, ACL block or ACL group from this port
cur - Display current ACLs for this port
Table 6-27 Port ACL Menu Options (/cfg/port/aclqos)
Command Syntax and Usage meter <meter number, 1-127>
Displays the Metering Menu. To view menu options, see
re-mark <re-mark number, 1-127>
Displays the Re-Mark Menu. To view menu options, see
. add acl|blk|grp <1-4096>
Adds the specified ACL, ACL Block, or ACL Group to the port. You can add multiple ACL
Groups to a port, but the total number of precedence levels allowed is eight. rem acl|blk|grp <1-4096>
Removes the specified ACL, ACL Block, or ACL Group from the port. cur
Displays current ACL QoS parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 211
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/port <port alias or number> aclqos/meter <meter number>
ACL Port Metering Menu
[Metering Menu]
cir - Set committed rate in KiloBits/s
mbsize - Set maximum burst size in KiloBits
enable - Enable/disable port metering
dpass - Set to Drop or Pass out of profile traffic
assign - Assign meter to ACL, ACL block or ACL group
unassign - Unassign meter from ACL, ACL block or ACL group
reset - Reset meter parameters
cur - Display current settings
This menu defines the Access Control profile for the selected ACL group on the port.
Table 6-28 ACL Metering Menu Options (/cfg/port/aclqos/meter)
Command Syntax and Usage cir <64-1000000>
Configures the committed rate, in Kilobits per second. The committed rate must be a multiple of 64. mbsize <32-4096>
Configures the maximum burst size, in Kilobits. Enter one of the following values for mbsize : 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096
enable e|d
Enables or disables ACL Metering on the port.
dpass drop|pass
Configures the ACL Meter to either drop or pass out-of-profile traffic.
assign acl|blk|grp <1-4096>
Adds an ACL, ACL Block, or ACL Group to the ACL Meter on this port.
unassign acl|blk|grp <1-4096>
Removes an ACL, ACL Block, or ACL Group from the ACL Meter on this port.
reset
Reset ACL Metering parameters to their default values. cur
Displays current ACL Metering parameters.
212 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/port <port alias or number> aclqos/ re-mark <re-mark number>
Re-Mark Menu
[Re-mark Menu]
inprof - In Profile Menu
outprof - Out Profile Menu
assign - Assign re-mark action to ACL item
unassign - Unassign re-mark action from ACL item
reset - Reset re-mark settings
cur - Display current settings
You can choose to re-mark IP header data for the selected ACL Group on the port. You can configure different re-mark values, based on whether packets fall within the ACL Metering profile, or out of the ACL Metering profile.
Table 6-29 ACL Re-Mark Options (/cfg/port/aclqos/re-mark)
Command Syntax and Usage inprof
Displays the Re-Mark In-Profile Menu. To view menu options, see
outprof
Displays the Re-Mark Out-of-Profile Menu. To view menu options, see page 215
.
assign acl|blk|grp <1-4096>
Assign an ACL, ACL Block, or ACL Group for DSCP remarking on this port.
unassign acl|blk|grp <1-4096>
Remove an ACL, ACL Block, or ACL Group from DSCP remarking on this port. reset
Reset ACL Re-Mark parameters to their default values. cur
Displays current Re-Mark parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 213
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/port <port alias or number> aclqos/ re-mark <ACL group number>/inprof
Re-Marking In-Profile Menu
[Re-marking - In Profile Menu]
up1p - Set Update User Priority Menu
updscp - Set the update DSCP
reset - Reset update DSCP settings
cur - Display current settings
Table 6-30 ACL Re-Mark In-Profile Options (/cfg/port/aclqos/re-mark/inprof)
Command Syntax and Usage up1p
Displays the Re-Mark In-Profile Update User Priority Menu. To view menu options, see
updscp <0-63>
Sets the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of In-Profile packets to the selected value. reset
Resets the update DSCP parameters to their default values. cur
Displays current Re-Mark In-Profile parameters.
214 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/port <port alias or number> aclqos/ re-mark/inprof <ACL group number>/up1p
Update User Priority Menu
[Update User Priority Menu]
value - Set the update user priority
utosp - Enable/Disable use of TOS precedence
reset - Reset in profile up1p settings
cur - Display current settings
Table 6-31 ACL Re-mark User Priority Options (/cfg/port/aclqos/re-mark/inprof/ up1p)
Command Syntax and Usage value <0-7>
Defines 802.1p value. The value is the priority bits information in the packet structure.
utosp enable|disable
Enable or disable mapping of TOS (Type of Service) priority to 802.1p priority for In-Profile packets. When enabled, the TOS value is used to set the 802.1p value. reset
Resets UP1P settings to their default values. cur
Displays current Re-Mark In-Profile User Priority parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 215
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/port <port alias or number> aclqos/ re-mark <ACL group number>/outprof
Re-Marking Out-of-Profile Menu
[Re-marking - Out Of Profile Menu]
updscp - Set the update DSCP
reset - reset update DSCP setting
cur - Display current settings
Table 6-32 ACL Re-mark Out-of-Profile Options (/cfg/port/aclqos/re-mark/ outprof)
Command Syntax and Usage updscp <0-63>
Sets the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of Out-of-Profile packets to the selected value. The switch sets the DSCP value on Out-of-Profile packets. reset
Resets the update DSCP parameters for Out-of-Profile packets to their default values. cur
Displays current Re-Mark Out-of-Profile parameters.
216 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2
Layer 2 Configuration
[Layer 2 Menu]
8021x - 802.1x Menu
mrst - Multiple Spanning Tree/Rapid Spanning Tree Menu
stg - Spanning Tree Menu
fdb - FDB
trunk - Trunk Group Menu
thash - IP Trunk Hash Menu
lacp - Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu
failovr - Failover Menu
vlan - VLAN Menu
upfast - Enable/disable Uplink Fast
update - UplinkFast station update rate
bpdugrd - Enable/disable BPDU Guard
macnotif - Enable/disable MAC address notification
cur - Display current layer 2 parameters
Table 6-33 Layer 2 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage
8021x
Displays the 802.1x Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 219
.
mrst
Displays the Rapid Spanning Tree/Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration Menu. To view
.
stg <group number [1-128]>
Displays the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see
fdb
Displays the Forwarding Database (FDB) Menu. To view menu options, see
trunk <trunk group number (1-13)>
Displays the Trunk Group Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see
thash
Displays the IP Trunk Hash Menu. To view menu options, see page 240
. lacp
Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 242
. failovr
Displays the Failover Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 244
.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 217
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-33 Layer 2 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2)
Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>
Displays the VLAN Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see
upfast enable|disable
Enables or disables Fast Uplink Convergence, which provides rapid Spanning Tree convergence to an upstream switch during failover.
Note: When enabled, this feature increases bridge priorities to 65500 for all STGs and path cost by 3000 for all external STP ports. update <10-200>
Configures the station update rate. The default value is 40.
bpdugrd enable|disable
Enables or disables BPDU guard, to avoid spanning-tree loops on ports with Port Fast Forwarding enabled (/cfg/port x/fastfwd ena).
macnotif enable|disable
Enables or disables MAC Address Notification. With MAC Address Notification enabled, the switch generates a syslog message when a MAC address is added or removed from the MAC address table. cur
Displays current Layer 2 parameters.
218 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/8021x
802.1x Configuration
[802.1x Configuration Menu]
global - Global 802.1x configuration menu
port - Port 802.1x configuration menu
ena - Enable 802.1x access control
dis - Disable 802.1x access control
cur - Show 802.1x configuration
This feature allows you to configure the GbESM as an IEEE 802.1x Authenticator, to provide port-based network access control.
Table 6-34 802.1x Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/8021x)
Command Syntax and Usage global
Displays the global 802.1x Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 220 .
port <port alias or number>
Displays the 802.1x Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 223
.
ena
Globally enables 802.1x. dis
Globally disables 802.1x. cur
Displays current 802.1x parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 219
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/8021x/global
802.1x Global Configuration
[802.1x Global Configuration Menu]
gvlan - 802.1x Guest VLAN configuration menu
mode - Set access control mode
qtperiod - Set EAP-Request/Identity quiet time interval
txperiod - Set EAP-Request/Identity retransmission timeout
suptmout - Set EAP-Request retransmission timeout
svrtmout - Set server authentication request timeout
maxreq - Set max number of EAP-Request retransmissions
raperiod - Set reauthentication time interval
reauth - Set reauthentication status to on or off
default - Restore default 802.1x configuration
cur - Display current 802.1x configuration
The global 802.1x menu allows you to configure parameters that affect all ports in the GbESM.
Table 6-35 802.1x Global Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/global)
Command Syntax and Usage gvlan
Displays the 802.1x Guest VLAN Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 222
.
mode force-unauth|auto|force-auth
Sets the type of access control for all ports:
force-unauth - the port is unauthorized unconditionally. auto - the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the RADIUS server. force-auth - the port is authorized unconditionally, allowing all traffic.
The default value is force-auth. qtperiod <0-65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP-Request/ Identity frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication failure in the previous round of authentication. The default value is 60 seconds. txperiod <1-65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response/Identity frame from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting an EAP-Request/Identity frame. The default value is 30 seconds. suptmout <1-65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response packet from the supplicant
(client) before retransmitting the EAP-Request packet to the authentication server. The default value is 30 seconds.
220 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-35 802.1x Global Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/global)
Command Syntax and Usage svrtmout <1-65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for a response from the RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout. The default value is 30 seconds.
The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access-Request packet containing the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP-Response packet is determined by the current setting of
/cfg/sys/radius/timeout (default is 3 seconds). maxreq <1-10>
Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP-Request packet to the supplicant (client). The default value is 2. raperiod <1-604800>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before re-authenticating a supplicant (client) when periodic re-authentication is enabled. The default value is 3600 seconds. reauth on|off
Sets the re-authentication status to on or off. The default value is off. default
Resets the global 802.1x parameters to their default values. cur
Displays current global 802.1x parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 221
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/8021x/global/gvlan
802.1x Guest VLAN Configuration
[802.1x Guest VLAN Configuration Menu]
vlan - Set 8021.x Guest VLAN number
ena - Enable 8021.xGuest VLAN
dis - Disable 8021.x Guest VLAN
cur - Display current Guest VLAN configuration
The 802.1x Guest VLAN menu allows you to configure a Guest VLAN for unauthenticated ports. The Guest VLAN provides limited access to switch functions.
Table 6-36 802.1x Guest VLAN Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/8021x/global/gvlan)
Command Syntax and Usage vlan <1-4094>
Configures the Guest VLAN number. ena
Enables the 802.1x Guest VLAN.
dis
Disables the 802.1x Guest VLAN.
cur
Displays current 802.1x Guest VLAN parameters.
222 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/8021x/port < alias or number>
802.1x Port Configuration
[802.1x Port Configuration Menu]
mode - Set access control mode
qtperiod - Set EAP-Request/Identity quiet time interval
txperiod - Set EAP-Request/Identity retransmission timeout
suptmout - Set EAP-Request retransmission timeout
svrtmout - Set server authentication request timeout
maxreq - Set max number of EAP-Request retransmissions
raperiod - Set reauthentication time interval
reauth - Set reauthentication status to on or off
default - Restore default 802.1x configuration
global - Apply current global 802.1x configuration to this port
cur - Display current 802.1x configuration
The 802.1x port menu allows you to configure parameters that affect the selected port in the
GbESM. These settings override the global 802.1x parameters.
Table 6-37 802.1x Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/port)
Command Syntax and Usage mode force-unauth|auto|force-auth
Sets the type of access control for the port:
force-unauth - the port is unauthorized unconditionally. auto - the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the RADIUS server. force-auth - the port is authorized unconditionally, allowing all traffic.
The default value is force-auth. qtperiod <0-65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP-Request/ Identity frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication failure in the previous round of authentication. The default value is 60 seconds. txperiod <1-65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response/Identity frame from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting an EAP-Request/Identity frame. The default value is 30 seconds. suptmout <1-65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP-Response packet from the supplicant
(client) before retransmitting the EAP-Request packet to the authentication server. The default value is 30 seconds.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 223
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-37 802.1x Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/8021x/port)
Command Syntax and Usage svrtmout <1-65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for a response from the RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout. The default value is 30 seconds.
The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access-Request packet containing the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP-Response packet is determined by the current setting of
/cfg/sys/radius/timeout (default is 3 seconds). maxreq <1-10>
Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP-Request packet to the supplicant (client). The default value is 2. raperiod <1-604800>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before re-authenticating a supplicant (client) when periodic re-authentication is enabled. The default value is 3600 seconds. reauth on|off
Sets the re-authentication status to on or off. The default value is off. default
Resets the 802.1x port parameters to their default values. global
Applies current global 802.1x configuration parameters to the port. cur
Displays current 802.1x port parameters.
224 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/mrst
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol/
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration
[Multiple Spanning Tree Menu]
cist - Common and Internal Spanning Tree menu
name - Set MST region name
rev - Set revision level of this MST region
maxhop - Set Maximum Hop Count for MST (4 - 60)
mode - Spanning Tree Mode
on - Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP/RSTP) ON
off - Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP/RSTP) OFF
cur - Display current MST parameters
Alteon OS supports the IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) and IEEE 802.1s
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). MSTP allows you to map many VLANs to a small number of spanning tree groups, each with its own topology.
Up to 32 Spanning Tree Groups can be configured in mstp mode. MRST is turned off by default.
N OTE – When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned on, VLAN 4095 is moved from Spanning Tree
Group 128 to the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned off, VLAN 4095 is moved back to Spanning Tree Group 128.
Table 6-38 MSTP/RSTP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst)
Command Syntax and Usage cist
Displays the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) Menu. To view menu options, see page 227 .
name <1-32 characters>
Configures a name for the MSTP region. All devices within a MSTP region must have the same region name. rev <1-65535>
Configures a version number for the MSTP region. The version is used as a numerical identifier for the region. All devices within a MSTP region must have the same version number. maxhop <4-60>
Configures the maximum number of bridge hops a packet may to traverse before it is dropped. The range is from 4 to 60 hops. The default is 20.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 225
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-38 MSTP/RSTP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst)
Command Syntax and Usage
mode rstp|mstp
Selects either Rapid Spanning Tree mode (rstp) or Multiple Spanning Tree mode (mstp). The default mode is RSTP. on
Globally turns RSTP/MSTP ON.
Note: When RSTP is turned on, the configuration parameters for STG 1 apply to RSTP. off
Globally turns RSTP/MSTP OFF.
cur
Displays the current RSTP/MSTP configuration.
226 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/mrst/cist
Common Internal Spanning Tree Configuration
[Common Internal Spanning Tree Menu]
brg - CIST Bridge parameter menu
port - CIST Port parameter menu
add - Add VLAN(s) to CIST
default - Default Common Internal Spanning Tree and Member parameters
cur - Display current CIST parameters
Table 6-39 describes the commands used to configure Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST)
parameters. The CIST provides compatibility with different MSTP regions and with devices running different Spanning Tree instances. It is equivalent to Spanning Tree Group 0.
Table 6-39 CIST Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist)
Command Syntax and Usage brg
Displays the CIST Bridge Menu. To view menu options, see
port <port alias or number>
Displays the CIST Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 229
.
add <VLAN numbers>
Adds selected VLANs to the CIST. default
Resets all CIST parameters to their default values. cur
Displays the current CIST configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 227
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/brg
CIST Bridge Configuration
[CIST Bridge Menu]
prior - Set CIST bridge Priority (0-65535)
mxage - Set CIST bridge Max Age (6-40 secs)
fwd - Set CIST bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)
cur - Display current CIST bridge parameters
CIST bridge parameters are used only when the switch is in MSTP or RSTP mode. CIST parameters do not affect operation of STP/PVST+.
Table 6-40 CIST Bridge Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/brg)
Command Syntax and Usage prior <0-65535>
Configures the CIST bridge priority. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the MSTP root bridge. To make this switch the root bridge, configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. The lower the value, the higher the bridge priority. The range is 0 to 65535, and the default is 32768.
mxage <6-40 seconds>
Configures the CIST bridge maximum age. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigures the MSTP network. The range is 6 to 40 seconds, and the default is 20 seconds.
fwd <4-30 seconds>
Configures the CIST bridge forward delay parameter. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state. The range is 4 to 30 seconds, and the default is 15 seconds.
cur
Displays the current CIST bridge configuration.
228 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/port < port alias or number>
CIST Port Configuration
[CIST Port 1 Menu]
prior - Set port Priority (0-240)
cost - Set port Path Cost (1-200000000, 0 for auto)
hello - Set CIST port Hello Time (1-10 secs)
link - Set MSTP link type (auto, p2p, or shared; default: auto)
edge - Enable/disable edge port
on - Turn port's Spanning Tree ON
off - Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF
cur - Display current port Spanning Tree parameters
CIST port parameters are used to modify MRST operation on an individual port basis. CIST parameters do not affect operation of STP/PVST+. For each port, RSTP/MSTP is turned on by default.
Table 6-41 CIST Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/port)
Command Syntax and Usage prior <0-240>
Configures the CIST port priority. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment.
The range is 0 to 240, in steps of 16 (0, 16, 32...), and the default is 128. cost <0-200000000>
Configures the CIST port path cost. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost.
The default is 2000 for 10 Gigabit ports, 20000 for Gigabit ports. hello <1-10 seconds>
Configures the CIST port Hello time.The Hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge Hello value. The range is 1 to 10 seconds, and the default is 2 seconds.
link <auto, p2p, or shared; default: auto>
Defines the type of link connected to the port, as follows: auto : Configures the port to detect the link type, and automatically match its settings. p2p : Configures the port for Point-To-Point protocol. shared : Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a hub).
The default link type is auto.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 229
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-41 CIST Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/mrst/cist/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
edge disable|enable
Enables or disables this port as an edge port. An edge port is not connected to a bridge, and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up. Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled).
This command is disabled by default.
on
Enables MRST on the port. off
Disables MRST on the port. cur
Displays the current CIST port configuration.
230 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/stg < STP group number>
Spanning Tree Configuration
[Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu]
brg - Bridge parameter menu
port - Port parameter menu
add - Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group
remove - Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group
clear - Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group
on - Globally turn Spanning Tree ON
off - Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF
default - Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters
cur - Display current bridge parameters
Alteon OS supports the IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). STP is used to prevent loops in the network topology. Up to 128 Spanning Tree Groups can be configured on the switch (STG 128 is reserved for management).
N OTE – When VRRP is used for active/active redundancy, STG must be enabled.
Table 6-42 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stg)
Command Syntax and Usage brg
Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu. To view menu options, see
port <port alias or number>
Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu. To view menu options, see
add <VLAN number (1-4094)>
Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter.
remove <VLAN number (1-4094)>
Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter.
clear
Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree.
on
Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol. STG is turned on by default. off
Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 231
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-42 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stg)
Command Syntax and Usage default
Restores a spanning tree instance to its default configuration.
cur
Displays current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters.
232 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/stg < STP group number>/brg
Spanning Tree Bridge Configuration
[Bridge Spanning Tree Menu]
prior - Set bridge Priority [0-65535]
hello - Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs]
mxage - Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs)
fwd - Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)
aging - Set bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs, 0 to disable)
cur - Display current bridge parameters
Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STG operation of the switch. STG bridge parameters include:
Bridge priority
Bridge hello time
Bridge maximum age
Forwarding delay
Bridge aging time
Table 6-43 Spanning Tree Bridge Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/brg)
Command Syntax and Usage prior <new bridge priority (0-65535)>
Configures the bridge priority. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STG root bridge. To make this switch the root bridge, configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network. The lower the value, the higher the bridge priority. The range is 0 to 65535, and the default is 32768.
RSTP/MSTP: The range is 0 to 61440, in steps of 4096 (0, 4096, 8192...), and the default is 32768. hello <new bridge hello time (1-10 secs)>
Configures the bridge hello time.The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. The range is 1 to 10 seconds, and the default is 2 seconds.
This command does not apply to MSTP (see CIST on
mxage <new bridge max age (6-40 secs)>
Configures the bridge maximum age. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures the STG network. The range is 6 to 40 seconds, and the default is 20 seconds.
This command does not apply to MSTP (see CIST on
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 233
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-43 Spanning Tree Bridge Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/brg)
Command Syntax and Usage fwd <new bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)>
Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state. The range is 4 to 30 seconds, and the default is
15 seconds.
This command does not apply to MSTP (see CIST on
aging <new bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs, 0 to disable)>
Configures the forwarding database aging time. The aging time specifies the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the forwarding database. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds, and the default is 300 seconds. To disable aging, set this parameter to 0.
cur
Displays the current bridge STG parameters.
When configuring STG bridge parameters, the following formulas must be used:
2*(fwd-1) > mxage
2*(hello+1) < mxage
234 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/stg <STP Group number>/port <port alias or number>
Spanning Tree Port Configuration
[Spanning Tree Port EXT1 Menu]
prior - Set port Priority (0-255)
cost - Set port Path Cost (1-65535 (802.1d) /
1-200000000 (MSTP/RSTP) /0 for auto)
link - Set port link type (auto, p2p, or shared; default: auto)
edge - Enable/disable edge port
on - Turn port's Spanning Tree ON
off - Turn port's Spanning Tree OFF
cur - Display current port Spanning Tree parameters
By default for STP/PVST+, Spanning Tree is turned Off for internal ports and management ports, and turned On for external ports. By default for RSTP/MSTP, Spanning Tree is turned
Off for internal ports and management ports, and turned On for external ports, with internal ports configured as Edge ports. STG port parameters include:
Port priority
Port path cost
The port option of STG is turned on by default.
Table 6-44 Spanning Tree Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/port)
Command Syntax and Usage prior <new port Priority (0-255)>
Configures the port priority. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. The default value is 128.
RSTP/MSTP: The range is 0 to 240, in steps of 16 (0, 16, 32...) and the default is 128.
cost <new port Path Cost (1-65535, 0 for default)>
Configures the port path cost. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster the port, the lower the path cost. The default is 19 for
100Mbps ports, 4 for 1Gb ports. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the default cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. link <auto, p2p, or shared; default: auto>
Defines the type of link connected to the port, as follows: auto : Configures the port to detect the link type, and automatically match its settings. p2p : Configures the port for Point-To-Point protocol. shared : Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a hub).
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 235
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-44 Spanning Tree Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stg/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
edge disable|enable
Enables or disables this port as an edge port. An edge port is not connected to a bridge, and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up. Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled). on
Enables STG on the port.
off
Disables STG on the port.
cur
Displays the current STG port parameters.
236 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/fdb
Forwarding Database Configuration
[FDB Menu]
static - Static FDB Menu
learn - Enable/disable FDB Learning for all ports
flood - Enable/disable Flooding of Unknown Destination MACs
cur - Display current FDB configuration
Use the following commands to configure the Forwarding Database (FDB) for the GbESM.
Table 6-45 FDB Menu Options (/cfg/l2/fdb)
Command Syntax and Usage static
Displays the static FDB menu. To view menu options, see
learn disable|enable
Enables or disables FDB learning. The default value is enabled.
flood disable|enable
Enables or disables flooding of packets with unknown MAC addresses to all ports.
The default value is enabled.
Note: If you disable FDB flooding, you must also disable FDB learning. cur
Display current FDB configuration.
N OTE – If you disable FDB learning and FDB flooding, manually add static MAC address entries for the management module, blade servers, and other connected devices. The static entries ensure that the GbESM retains connectivity to those devices. Use the following command to add static MAC address entries:
/cfg/l2/fdb/static/add
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 237
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/fdb/static
Static FDB Configuration
[Static FDB Menu]
add - Add a permanent FDB entry
del - Delete a static FDB entry
clear - Clear static FDB entries
cur - Display current static FDB configuration
Use the following commands to configure static entries in the FDB.
Table 6-46 Static FDB Menu Options (/cfg/l2/fdb/static)
Command Syntax and Usage add <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number>
Adds a permanent FDB entry.
del <MAC address> <VLAN number>
Deletes a permanent FDB entry.
clear <MAC address>|all {mac|vlan|port}
Clears static FDB entries. cur
Display current static FDB configuration.
238 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/trunk <trunk group number>
Trunk Configuration
[Trunk group 1 Menu]
add - Add port to trunk group
rem - Remove port from trunk group
ena - Enable trunk group
dis - Disable trunk group
del - Delete trunk group
cur - Display current Trunk Group configuration
Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth connections between GbE Switch Module s or other trunk capable devices. A trunk is a group of ports that act together, combining their bandwidth to create a single, larger port. Up to 13 trunk groups can be configured on the GbE Switch Module , with the following restrictions:
Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group.
Up to six ports/trunks can belong to the same trunk group.
Configure all ports in a trunk group with the same link configuration (speed, duplex, flow control).
Trunking from non-Alteon devices must comply with Cisco
®
EtherChannel
®
technology.
By default, each trunk group is empty and disabled.
Table 6-47 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk)
Command Syntax and Usage add <port alias or number>
Adds a physical port to the current trunk group.
rem <port alias or number>
Removes a physical port from the current trunk group.
ena
Enables the current trunk group.
dis
Disables the current trunk group.
del
Removes the current trunk group configuration.
cur
Displays current trunk group parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 239
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/thash
IP Trunk Hash Configuration
[IP Trunk Hash Menu]
set - IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu
cur - Display current IP trunk hash configuration
Use the following commands to configure IP trunk hash settings for the GbESM.
Table 6-48 IP Trunk Hash Menu Options (/cfg/l2/thash)
Command Syntax and Usage set
Displays the Trunk Hash Settings menu. To view menu options, see page 240
.
cur
Display current trunk hash configuration.
/cfg/l2/thash/set
IP Trunk Hash
[set IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu]
smac - Enable/disable smac hash
dmac - Enable/disable dmac hash
sip - Enable/disable sip hash
dip - Enable/disable dip hash
cur - Display current trunk hash setting
Trunk hash parameters are set globally for the GbE Switch Module. You can enable one or two parameters, to configure any of the following valid combinations:
SMAC (source MAC only)
DMAC (destination MAC only)
SIP (source IP only)
DIP (destination IP only)
SIP + DIP (source IP and destination IP)
SMAC + DMAC (source MAC and destination MAC)
240 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Use the following commands to configure IP trunk hash parameters for the GbESM.
Table 6-49 IP Trunk Hash Menu Options (/cfg/l2/thash/set)
Command Syntax and Usage
smac enable|disable
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source MAC.
dmac enable|disable
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination MAC.
sip enable|disable
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source IP.
dip enable|disable
Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination IP. cur
Display current layer 2 trunk hash setting.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 241
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/lacp
LACP Configuration
[LACP Menu]
sysprio - Set LACP system priority
timeout - Set LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner
info
port - LACP port Menu
cur - Display current LACP configuration
Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the
GbESM.
Table 6-50 LACP Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp)
Command Syntax and Usage sysprio <1-65535>
Defines the priority value (1 through 65535) for the GbESM. Lower numbers provide higher priority. The default value is 32768. timeout short|long
Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner. Choose short
(3 seconds) or long (90 seconds). The default value is long.
Note: It is recommended that you use a timeout value of long, to reduce LACPDU processing. If your GbESM’s CPU utilization rate remains at 100% for periods of 90 seconds or more, consider using static trunks instead of LACP. port <port alias or number>
Displays the LACP Port menu. To view menu options, see page 243
.
cur
Display current LACP configuration.
242 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/lacp/port <port alias or number>
LACP Port Configuration
[LACP Port EXT1 Menu]
mode - Set LACP mode
prio - Set LACP port priority
adminkey - Set LACP port admin key
cur - Display current LACP port configuration
Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the selected port.
Table 6-51 LACP Port Menu Options (/cfg/l2/lacp/port)
Command Syntax and Usage mode off|active|passive
Set the LACP mode for this port, as follows:
off
Turn LACP off for this port. You can use this port to manually configure a static trunk. The default value is off.
active
Turn LACP on and set this port to active. Active ports initiate LACPDUs.
passive
Turn LACP on and set this port to passive. Passive ports do not initiate LACPDUs, but respond to LACPDUs from active ports. prio <1-65535>
Sets the priority value for the selected port. Lower numbers provide higher priority. Default is
32768. adminkey <1-65535>
Set the admin key for this port. Only ports with the same admin key and oper key (operational state generated internally) can form a LACP trunk group. cur
Displays the current LACP configuration for this port.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 243
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/failovr
Layer 2 Failover Configuration
[Failover Menu]
trigger - Trigger Menu
vlan - Globally turn VLAN Monitor ON/OFF
on - Globally turn Failover ON
off - Globally turn Failover OFF
cur - Display current Failover configuration
Use this menu to configure Layer 2 Failover. For more information about Layer 2 Failover, see
“High Availability” in the Alteon OS Application Guide.
Table 6-52 Layer 2 Failover Menu Options (/cfg/l2/failovr)
Command Syntax and Usage trigger <1-8>
Displays the Failover Trigger menu. To view menu options, see page 245
.
vlan on|off
Globally turns VLAN monitor on or off. When the VLAN Monitor is on, the switch automatically disables only internal ports that belong to the same VLAN as ports in the failover trigger. The default value is off. on
Globally turns Layer 2 failover on. off
Globally turns Layer 2 failover off. cur
Displays current Layer 2 failover parameters.
244 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger
Failover Trigger Configuration
[Trigger 1 Menu]
amon - Auto Monitor Menu
limit - Limit of Trigger
ena - Enable Trigger
dis - Disable Trigger
cur - Display current Trigger configuration
Table 6-53 Failover Trigger Menu Options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger)
Command Syntax and Usage amon
Displays the Auto Monitor menu for the selected trigger. To view menu options, see
limit <0-5>
Configures the minimum number of operational links allowed within each trigger before the trigger initiates a failover event. If you enter a value of zero (0), the switch triggers a failover event only when no links in the trigger are operational. ena
Enables the selected trigger. dis
Disables the selected trigger. cur
Displays the current failover trigger settings.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 245
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/amon
Auto Monitor Configuration
[Auto Monitor Menu]
addtrnk - Add trunk to Auto Monitor
remtrnk - Remove trunk from Auto Monitor
addkey - Add LACP port adminkey to Auto Monitor
remkey - Remove LACP port adminkey from Auto Monitor
cur - Display current Auto Monitor configuration
Table 6-54 Auto Monitor Menu Options (/cfg/l2/failovr/trigger/amon)
Command Syntax and Usage addtrnk <Trunk Group number (1-13)>
Adds a trunk group to the Auto Monitor. remtrnk <Trunk Group number (1-13)>
Removes a trunk group from the Auto Monitor. addkey <1-65535>
Adds a LACP admin key to the Auto Monitor. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the Auto Monitor. remkey <1-65535>
Removes a LACP admin key from the Auto Monitor. cur
Displays the current Auto Monitor settings.
246 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/vlan <VLAN number>
VLAN Configuration
[VLAN 1 Menu]
pvlan - Protocol VLAN Menu
privlan - Private-VLAN Menu
name - Set VLAN name
stg - Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group
add - Add port to VLAN
rem - Remove port from VLAN
def - Define VLAN as list of ports
ena - Enable VLAN
dis - Disable VLAN
del - Delete VLAN
cur - Display current VLAN configuration
The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes, change the status of each VLAN, change the port membership of each VLAN, and delete VLANs. For more information on configuring VLANs, see
“Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 38
.
By default, the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1, which is enabled all the time.
Internal server ports (INTx) and external ports (EXTx) are in VLAN 1 by default. Up to 1024
VLANs can be configured on the GbESM.
Table 6-55 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan)
Command Syntax and Usage pvlan <1-8>
Displays the Protocol-based VLAN menu. To view menu options, see
.
privlan
Displays the Private VLAN menu. To view menu options, see
name
Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. The default VLAN name is the first one.
stg <Spanning Tree Group index [1-128]>
Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group.
add <port alias or number>
Adds port(s) to the VLAN membership.
rem <port alias or number>
Removes port(s) from this VLAN.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 247
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-55 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan)
Command Syntax and Usage def <list of port numbers>
Defines which ports are members of this VLAN. Every port must be a member of at least one
VLAN. By default, internal server ports (INTx) and external ports (EXTx) are in VLAN 1. ena
Enables this VLAN.
dis
Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration.
del
Deletes this VLAN.
cur
Displays the current VLAN configuration.
N OTE – All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. Any port which is removed from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN 1. You cannot remove a port from VLAN 1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN.
Also, you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned
on (see the tag command on page 208 ).
248 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/vlan/pvlan <protocol number>
Protocol-based VLAN Configuration
[VLAN 1 Protocol 1 Menu]
pty - Set protocol type
prio - Set priority to protocol
add - Add port to PVLAN
rem - Remove port from PVLAN
del - Delete protocol
ena - Enable protocol
dis - Disable protocol
ports - Add/Remove a list of ports to/from PVLAN
tagpvl - Enable/Disable port tagging for PVLAN
taglist - Enable tagging a port list for PVLAN
cur - Display current PVLAN configuration
Use this menu to configure Protocol-based VLAN (PVLAN) for the selected VLAN.
Table 6-56 PVLAN Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan/pvlan)
Command Syntax and Usage pty <(Ether2|SNAP|LLC)> <Ethernet type>
Configures the frame type and the Ethernet type for the selected protocol. Ethernet type consists of a 4-digit (16 bit) hex code, such as 0080 (IPv4). prio <0-7>
Configures the priority value for this PVLAN. add
Adds a port to the selected PVLAN. rem
Removes a port from the selected PVLAN. del
Deletes the selected protocol configuration from the VLAN. ena
Enables the selected protocol on the VLAN. dis
Disables the selected protocol on the VLAN. ports
Defines a list of ports that belong to the selected protocol on this VLAN. Enter 0 (zero) to remove all ports.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 249
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-56 PVLAN Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan/pvlan)
Command Syntax and Usage tagpvl enable|disable
Enables or disables port tagging on this PVLAN. taglist
Defines a list of ports that will be tagged by the selected protocol on this VLAN. Enter empty to disable tagging on all ports by this PVLAN. cur
Displays current parameters for the selected PVLAN.
250 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l2/vlan/privlan
Private VLAN Configuration
[privlan Menu]
type - Set Private-VLAN type
map - Associate secondary VLAN with a primary VLAN
ena - Enable Private-VLAN
dis - Disable Private-VLAN
cur - Display current Private-VLAN configuration
Use this menu to configure a Private VLAN.
Table 6-57 Private VLAN Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan/privlan)
Command Syntax and Usage type primary|isolated|community
Defines the VLAN type, as follows:
Primary: A Private VLAN must have only one primary VLAN. The primary VLAN carries unidirectional traffic to ports on the isolated VLAN or to community VLAN.
Isolated: The isolated VLAN carries unidirectional traffic from host ports. A Private VLAN may have only one isolated VLAN.
Community: Community VLANs carry upstream traffic from host ports. A Private VLAN may have multiple community VLANs. map <2-4094>
Configures Private VLAN mapping between a secondary VLAN (isolated or community) and a primary VLAN. Enter the primary VLAN ID. ena
Enables the Private VLAN. dis
Disables the Private VLAN. cur
Displays current parameters for the selected Private VLAN.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 251
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3
Layer 3 Configuration
[Layer 3 Menu]
if - Interface Menu
gw - Default Gateway Menu
route - Static Route Menu
mroute - Static IP Multicast Route Menu
arp - ARP Menu
frwd - Forwarding Menu
nwf - Network Filters Menu
rmap - Route Map Menu
rip - Routing Information Protocol Menu
ospf - Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu
bgp - Border Gateway Protocol Menu
igmp - IGMP Menu
dns - Domain Name System Menu
bootp - Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu
vrrp - Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu
rtrid - Set router ID
cur - Display current IP configuration
Table 6-58 Layer 3 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-128)>
Displays the IP Interface Menu. To view menu options, see
gw <default gateway number (1-132)>
Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu. To view menu options, see page 255
.
route
Displays the IP Static Route Menu. To view menu options, see
mroute
Displays the Static IP Multicast Route Menu. To view menu options, see page 257
. arp
Displays the Address Resolution Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 258
. frwd
Displays the IP Forwarding Menu. To view menu options, see
nwf <Network filter number (1-256)>
Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu. To view menu options see
252 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-58 Layer 3 Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3)
Command Syntax and Usage rmap <route map number (1-32)>
Displays the Route Map Menu. To view menu options see page 262
.
rip
Displays the Routing Interface Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 266
.
ospf
Displays the OSPF Menu. To view menu options, see
bgp
Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 279
.
igmp
Displays the IGMP Menu. To view menu options, see page 285
.
dns
Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu. To view menu options, see
bootp
Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see
vrrp
Displays the Virtual Router Redundancy Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see
.
rtrid <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Sets the router ID.
cur
Displays the current IP configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 253
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/if <interface number>
IP Interface Configuration
[IP Interface 1 Menu]
addr - Set IP address
mask - Set subnet mask
vlan - Set VLAN number
relay - Enable or disable BOOTP relay
ena - Enable interface
dis - Disable interface
del - Delete interface
cur - Display current interface configuration
The GbE Switch Module can be configured with up to 128 IP interfaces. Each IP interface represents the GbE Switch Module on an IP subnet on your network. The Interface option is disabled by default.
N OTE – To maintain connectivity between the management module and the GbE Switch Module, use the management module interface to change the IP address of the switch.
Table 6-59 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>
Configures the IP address of the switch interface using dotted decimal notation.
mask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255.255.0)>
Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation.
vlan <VLAN number (1-4094)>
Configures the VLAN number for this interface. Each interface can belong to one VLAN, though any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it.
relay disable|enable
Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface. It is enabled by default.
ena
Enables this IP interface.
dis
Disables this IP interface.
254 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-59 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if)
Command Syntax and Usage del
Removes this IP interface.
cur
Displays the current interface settings.
/cfg/l3/gw <gateway number>
Default Gateway Configuration
[Default gateway 1 Menu]
addr - Set IP address
intr - Set interval between ping attempts
retry - Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN
arp - Enable/disable ARP only health checks
vlan - Set VLAN number
ena - Enable default gateway
dis - Disable default gateway
del - Delete default gateway
cur - Display current default gateway configuration
N OTE – The switch can be configured with up to 132 gateways. Gateways one to four are reserved for default gateways. Gateway 132 is reserved for the management VLAN.
This option is disabled by default.
Table 6-60 Default Gateway Menu Options (/cfg/l3/gw)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <default gateway address (such as, 192.4.17.44)>
Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation.
intr <0-60 seconds>
The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up. The intr option sets the time between health checks. The range is from 0 to 60 seconds. The default is 2 seconds.
retry <number of attempts (1-120)>
Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway inoperative. The range is from 1 to 120 attempts. The default is 8 attempts.
arp disable|enable
Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. This command is disabled by default.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 255
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-60 Default Gateway Menu Options (/cfg/l3/gw)
Command Syntax and Usage vlan <1-4095>
Sets the VLAN to be assigned to this default IP gateway.
ena
Enables the gateway for use.
dis
Disables the gateway.
del
Deletes the gateway from the configuration.
cur
Displays the current gateway settings.
/cfg/l3/route
IP Static Route Configuration
[IP Static Route Menu]
add - Add static route
rem - Remove static route
cur - Display current static routes
Up to 128 static routes can be configured.
Table 6-61 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/route)
Command Syntax and Usage add <destination> <mask> <gateway> <interface number>
Adds a static route. You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address, destination subnet mask, and gateway address. Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation.
rem <destination> <mask>
Removes a static route. The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation.
cur
Displays the current IP static routes.
256 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/mroute
IP Multicast Route Configuration
[IPMC Static Route Menu]
add - Add static IP Multicast route
rem - Remove static IP Multicast route
cur - Display current static IPMC route configuration
The following table describes the IP Multicast Route menu options.
Table 6-62 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/mroute)
Command Syntax and Usage add <IPMC destination> <vlan> <port> primary|backup|host <virtual router id|none>
Adds a static multicast route. You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address (in dotted decimal notation), VLAN, and member port. Indicate whether the route is used for a primary, backup, or host multicast router. rem <IPMC destination> <vlan> <port> primary|backup|host <virtual router id|none>
Removes a static multicast route. The destination address, VLAN, and member port of the route to remove must be specified. cur
Displays the current IP multicast routes.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 257
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/arp
ARP Configuration
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory. In any IP communication, the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet.
[ARP Menu]
static - Static ARP Menu
rearp - Set re-ARP period in minutes
cur - Display current ARP configuration
Table 6-63 ARP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage static
Displays Static ARP menu. To view options, see page 259
.
rearp <2-120 minutes>
Defines re-ARP period in minutes. You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes.
cur
Displays the current ARP configurations.
258 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/arp/static
ARP Static Configuration
Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that are learnt dynamically. Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network. Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests. Static ARPs can also be configured on some gateways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks.
[Static ARP Menu]
add - Add a permanent ARP entry
del - Delete an ARP entry
clear - Clear static ARP entries
cur - Display current static ARP configuration
Table 6-64 ARP Static Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp/static)
Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number>
Adds a permanent ARP entry.
del <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Deletes a permanent ARP entry.
clear [ <interface number>|<VLAN number>|<port number>|all] <ARP entry number>
Clears static ARP entries.
cur
Displays current static ARP configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 259
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/frwd
IP Forwarding Configuration
[IP Forwarding Menu]
dirbr - Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts
noicmprd - Enable/disable No ICMP Redirects
on - Globally turn IP Forwarding ON
off - Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF
cur - Display current IP Forwarding configuration
Table 6-65 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd)
Command Syntax and Usage
dirbr disable|enable
Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts. This command is disabled by default.
noicmprd disable|enable
Enables or disables ICMP re-directs. This command is disabled by default.
on
Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the GbE Switch Module.
off
Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the GbE Switch Module. Forwarding is turned off by default.
cur
Displays the current IP forwarding settings.
260 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/nwf
Network Filter Configuration
[IP Network Filter 1 Menu]
addr - IP Address
mask - IP Subnet mask
enable - Enable Network Filter
disable - Disable Network Filter
delete - Delete Network Filter
cur - Display current Network Filter configuration
Table 6-66 IP Network Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/nwf)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address, such as 192.4.17.44>
Sets the starting IP address for this filter. The default address is 0.0.0.0.
mask <subnet mask, such as 255.255.255.0>
Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with /cfg/l3/nwf/addr to define the range of IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled. The default value is 0.0.0.0.
For Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), assign the network filter to a route map, then assign the route map to the peer.
enable
Enables the Network Filter configuration.
disable
Disables the Network Filter configuration.
delete
Deletes the Network Filter configuration.
cur
Displays the current the Network Filter configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 261
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number>
Routing Map Configuration
N OTE – The map number (1-32) represents the routing map you wish to configure.
[IP Route Map 1 Menu]
alist - Access List number
aspath - AS Filter Menu
ap - Set as-path prepend of the matched route
lp - Set local-preference of the matched route
metric - Set metric of the matched route
type - Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route
prec - Set the precedence of this route map
weight - Set weight of the matched route
enable - Enable route map
disable - Disable route map
delete - Delete route map
cur - Display current route map configuration
Routing maps control and modify routing information.
Table 6-67 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap)
Command Syntax and Usage alist <number 1-8>
Displays the Access List menu. For more information, see page 264
.
aspath <number 1-8>
Displays the Autonomous System (AS) Filter menu. For more information, see page 265 .
ap <AS number> [<AS number>] [<AS number>]|none
Sets the AS path preference of the matched route. One to three path preferences can be configured.
lp <(0-4294967294)>|none
Sets the local preference of the matched route, which affects both inbound and outbound directions. The path with the higher preference is preferred.
metric <(1-4294967294)>|none
Sets the metric of the matched route.
type <value ( 1 | 2)> |none
Assigns the type of OSPF metric. The default is type 1.
Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics.
Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics. Type 1 routes have more cost than Type 2. none —Removes the OSPF metric.
262 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-67 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) (Continued)
Command Syntax and Usage prec <value (1-255)>
Sets the precedence of the route map. The smaller the value, the higher the precedence. Default value is 10.
weight <value (0-65534)>|none
Sets the weight of the route map.
enable
Enables the route map.
disable
Disables the route map.
delete
Deletes the route map.
cur
Displays the current route configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 263
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number/alist <access list number>
IP Access List Configuration
N OTE – The route map number (1-32) and the access list number (1-8) represent the IP access list you wish to configure.
[IP Access List 1 Menu]
nwf - Network Filter number
metric - Metric
action - Set Network Filter action
enable - Enable Access List
disable - Disable Access List
delete - Delete Access List
cur - Display current Access List configuration
Table 6-68 IP Access List Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/alist)
Command Syntax and Usage nwf <network filter number (1-256)>
Sets the network filter number. See “/cfg/l3/nwf” on page 261
for details.
metric <(1-4294967294)>|none
Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA.
action permit|deny
Permits or denies action for the access list.
enable
Enables the access list.
disable
Disables the access list.
delete
Deletes the access list.
cur
Displays the current Access List configuration.
264 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> aspath <autonomous system path>
Autonomous System Filter Path
N OTE – The rmap number (1-32) and the path number (1-8) represent the AS path you wish to configure.
[AS Filter 1 Menu]
as - AS number
action - Set AS Filter action
enable - Enable AS Filter
disable - Disable AS Filter
delete - Delete AS Filter
cur - Display current AS Filter configuration
Table 6-69 AS Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/aspath)
Command Syntax and Usage as <AS number (1-65535)>
Sets the Autonomous System filter’s path number.
action < permit | deny ( p | d )>
Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action.
enable
Enables the Autonomous System filter.
disable
Disables the Autonomous System filter.
delete
Deletes the Autonomous System filter.
current
Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 265
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/rip
Routing Information Protocol Configuration
[Routing Information Protocol Menu]
if - RIP Interface Menu
update - Set update period in seconds
on - Globally turn RIP ON
off - Globally turn RIP OFF
current - Display current RIP configuration
The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol (RIP) parameters. This option is turned off by default.
Table 6-70 RIP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip)
Command Syntax and Usage if <1-127>
Displays the RIP Interface menu. For more information, see
update <1-120>
Configures the time interval for sending for RIP table updates, in seconds.
The default value is 30 seconds. on
Globally turns RIP on.
off
Globally turns RIP off.
cur
Displays the current RIP configuration.
266 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/rip/if <interface number>
Routing Information Protocol Interface Configuration
[RIP Interface 1 Menu]
version - Set RIP version
supply - Enable/disable supplying route updates
listen - Enable/disable listening to route updates
poison - Enable/disable poisoned reverse
split - Enable/disable split horizon
trigg - Enable/disable triggered updates
mcast - Enable/disable multicast updates
default - Set default route action
metric - Set metric
auth - Set authentication type
key - Set authentication key
enable - Enable interface
disable - Disable interface
current - Display current RIP interface configuration
The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol parameters. This option is turned off by default.
N OTE – Do not configure RIP1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2.
Table 6-71 RIP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip/if)
Command Syntax and Usage version 1|2|both
Configures the RIP version used by this interface. The default value is version 2.
supply disable|enable
When enabled, the switch supplies routes to other routers. The default setting is enabled.
listen disable|enable
When enabled, the switch learns routes from other routers. The default setting is enabled. poison disable|enable
When enabled, the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. When disabled, the switch uses only split horizon. The default setting is disabled. split disable|enable
Enables or disables split horizon. The default setting is enabled.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 267
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-71 RIP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rip/if)
Command Syntax and Usage
trigg disable|enable
Enables or disables Triggered Updates. Triggered Updates are used to speed convergence. When enabled, Triggered Updates force a router to send update messages immediately, even if it is not yet time for the update message. The default setting is enabled.
mcast disable|enable
Enables or disables multicast updates of the routing table (using address 224.0.0.9). The default setting is enabled. default none|listen|supply|both
Configures the default route action. The default setting is none. metric <1-15>
Configures the route metric, which indicates the relative distance to the destination. The default value is 1. auth none|password
Configures the authentication type. The default is none. key
Configures the authentication key password. enable
Enables this RIP interface. disable
Disables this RIP interface. current
Displays the current RIP configuration.
268 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/ospf
Open Shortest Path First Configuration
[Open Shortest Path First Menu]
aindex - OSPF Area (index) menu
range - OSPF Summary Range menu
if - OSPF Interface menu
virt - OSPF Virtual Links menu
md5key - OSPF MD5 Key Menu
host - OSPF Host Entry menu
redist - OSPF Route Redistribute menu
lsdb - Set the LSDB limit
default - Originate default route information
on - Globally turn OSPF ON
off - Globally turn OSPF OFF
cur - Display current OSPF configuration
Table 6-72 OSPF Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)>
Displays the area index menu. This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number.
See
page 271 to view menu options.
range <range number (1-16)>
Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses. See page 272
to view menu options. if <interface number (1-127)>
Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu. See page 273
to view menu options.
virt <virtual link (1-3)>
Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link. See page 275
to view menu options.
md5key <key ID (1-255>
Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key. host <host entry number (1-128)>
Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes. Up to 128 host routes can be configured. Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF. It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and
ABR failover possible. See page 276
to view menu options.
redist fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp
Displays Route Distribution Menu. See
page 277 to view menu options.
lsdb <LSDB limit (0-2000, 0 for no limit)>
Sets the link state database limit.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 269
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-72 OSPF Configuration Menu (/cfg/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage default <metric (1-16777214)> <metric-type 1|2>|none
Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area. Use none for no default.
on
Enables OSPF on the GbE Switch Module.
off
Disables OSPF on the GbE Switch Module.
cur
Displays the current OSPF configuration settings.
270 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex <area index>
Area Index Configuration
[OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu]
areaid - Set area ID
type - Set area type
metric - Set stub area metric
auth - Set authentication type
spf - Set time interval between two SPF calculations
enable - Enable area
disable - Disable area
delete - Delete area
cur - Display current OSPF area configuration
Table 6-73 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex)
Command Syntax and Usage areaid <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number.
type transit|stub|nssa
Defines the type of area. For example, when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone, the area type must be defined as transit.
Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices. Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area.
Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed. Typically, a stub area is connected to only one other area.
NSSA: Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional capabilities. For example, routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas. External routes from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the
NSSA but are not distributed into other areas.
metric <metric value (1-65535)>
Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value. All routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions.
Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route. Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes.
auth none|password|md5
None: No authentication required.
Password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate.
MD5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required.
spf <interval (1-255)>
Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 271
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-73 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex)
Command Syntax and Usage enable
Enables the OSPF area.
disable
Disables the OSPF area.
delete
Deletes the OSPF area.
cur
Displays the current OSPF configuration.
/cfg/l3/ospf/range <range number>
OSPF Summary Range Configuration
[OSPF Summary Range 1 Menu]
addr - Set IP address
mask - Set IP mask
aindex - Set area index
hide - Enable/disable hide range
enable - Enable range
disable - Disable range
delete - Delete range
cur - Display current OSPF summary range configuration
Table 6-74 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP Address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Configures the base IP address for the range.
mask <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Configures the IP address mask for the range.
aindex <area index (0-2)>
Configures the area index used by the GbE Switch Module.
hide disable|enable
Hides the OSPF summary range.
enable
Enables the OSPF summary range.
272 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-74 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range)
Command Syntax and Usage disable
Disables the OSPF summary range.
delete
Deletes the OSPF summary range.
current
Displays the current OSPF summary range.
/cfg/l3/ospf/if <interface number>
OSPF Interface Configuration
[OSPF Interface 1 Menu]
aindex - Set area index
prio - Set interface router priority
cost - Set interface cost
hello - Set hello interval in seconds
dead - Set dead interval in seconds
trans - Set transit delay in seconds
retra - Set retransmit interval in seconds
key - Set authentication key
mdkey - Set MD5 key ID
enable - Enable interface
disable - Disable interface
delete - Delete interface
cur - Display current OSPF interface configuration
Table 6-75 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if)
Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)>
Configures the OSPF area index.
prio <priority value (0-255)>
Configures the priority value for the GbE Switch Module’s OSPF interfaces.
(A priority value of 255 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR).) cost <cost value (1-65535)>
Configures cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. Usually the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. Low cost indicates high bandwidth.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 273
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-75 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if)
Command Syntax and Usage hello <value (1-65535)>
Configures the interval in seconds between the hello packets for the interfaces.
dead <value (1-65535)>
Configures the health parameters of a hello packet, which is set for an interval of seconds before declaring a silent router to be down.
trans <value (1-3600)>
Configures the transit delay in seconds.
retra <value (0-3600)>
Configures the retransmit interval in seconds.
key <key> | none
Sets the authentication key to clear the password.
mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none
Assigns an MD5 key to the interface.
enable
Enables OSPF interface.
disable
Disables OSPF interface.
delete
Deletes OSPF interface.
cur
Displays the current settings for OSPF interface.
274 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/ospf/virt <link number>
OSPF Virtual Link Configuration
[OSPF Virtual Link 1 Menu]
aindex - Set area index
hello - Set hello interval in seconds
dead - Set dead interval in seconds
trans - Set transit delay in seconds
retra - Set retransmit interval in seconds
nbr - Set router ID of virtual neighbor
key - Set authentication key
mdkey - Set MD5 key ID
enable - Enable interface
disable - Disable interface
delete - Delete interface
cur - Display current OSPF interface configuration
Table 6-76 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt)
Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)>
Configures the OSPF area index.
hello <value (1-65535)>
Configures the authentication parameters of a hello packet, in seconds.
dead <value (1-65535)>
Configures the health parameters of a hello packet, in seconds. Default is 60 seconds.
trans <value (1-3600)>
Configures the delay in transit, in seconds. Default is one second.
retra <value (1-3600)>
Configures the retransmit interval, in seconds. Default is five seconds.
nbr <NBR router ID (IP address)>
Configures the router ID of the virtual neighbor. Default is 0.0.0.0.
key <password>
Configures the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link. Default is none.
mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none
Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link. Default is none.
enable
Enables OSPF virtual link.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 275
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-76 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt)
Command Syntax and Usage disable
Disables OSPF virtual link.
delete
Deletes OSPF virtual link.
cur
Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings.
/cfg/l3/ospf/host <host number>
OSPF Host Entry Configuration
[OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu]
addr - Set host entry IP address
aindex - Set area index
cost - Set cost of this host entry
enable - Enable host entry
disable - Disable host entry
delete - Delete host entry
cur - Display current OSPF host entry configuration
Table 6-77 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Configures the base IP address for the host entry.
aindex <area index (0-2)>
Configures the area index of the host.
cost <cost value (1-65535)>
Configures the cost value of the host.
enable
Enables OSPF host entry.
disable
Disables OSPF host entry.
276 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-77 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host)
Command Syntax and Usage delete
Deletes OSPF host entry.
cur
Displays the current OSPF host entries.
/cfg/l3/ospf/redist fixed | static | rip | ebgp | ibgp
OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration
[OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu]
add - Add rmap into route redistribution list
rem - Remove rmap from route redistribution list
export - Export all routes of this protocol
cur - Display current route-maps added
Table 6-78 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/redist)
Command Syntax and Usage add (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>)... |all
Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list.To add all the 32 route maps, enter all. To add specific route maps, enter routing map numbers one per line, NULL at the end.
This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list. The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed.
rem (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>) ... |all
Removes the route map from the route redistribution list.
Removes routing maps from the rmap list. To remove all 32 route maps, enter all. To remove specific route maps, enter routing map numbers one per line, NULL at end.
export <metric (1-16777214)><metric type [ 1 | 2 ]> |none
Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs in which the metric and metric type are specified. To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol, enter none.
cur
Displays the current route map settings.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 277
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/ospf/md5key <key ID>
OSPF MD5 Key Configuration
[OSPF MD5 Key 1 Menu]
key - Set authentication key
delete - Delete key
cur - Display current MD5 key configuration
Table 6-79 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/ip/ospf/md5key)
Command Syntax and Usage key
Sets the authentication key for this OSPF packet.
delete
Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet.
cur
Displays the current MD5 key configuration.
278 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/bgp
Border Gateway Protocol Configuration
[Border Gateway Protocol Menu]
peer - Peer menu
aggr - Aggregation menu
as - Set Autonomous System (AS) number
pref - Set Local Preference
on - Globally turn BGP ON
off - Globally turn BGP OFF
cur - Display current BGP configuration
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the
IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. BGP allows you to decide what is the “best” route for a packet to take from your network to a destination on another network, rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s) to your upstream provider(s). You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system or between different autonomous systems. When run within an autonomous system, it's called internal BGP (iBGP). When run between different autonomous systems, it's called external
BGP (eBGP). BGP is defined in RFC 1771.
The BGP Menu enables you to configure the switch to receive routes and to advertise static routes, fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other internal and external routers. In the current Alteon OS implementation, the GbE Switch Module does not advertise BGP routes that are learned from other BGP “speakers”.
The BGP menu option is turned off by default.
N OTE – Fixed routes are subnet routes. There is one fixed route per IP interface.
Table 6-80 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp)
Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer number (1-16)>
Displays the menu used to configure each BGP peer. Each border router, within an autonomous system, exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks. To view menu
.
aggr <aggregate number (1-16)>
Displays the Aggregation Menu. To view menu options, see
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 279
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-80 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp)
Command Syntax and Usage as <1-65535>
Set Autonomous System number. pref <local preference (0-4294967294)>
Sets the local preference. The path with the higher value is preferred.
When multiple peers advertise the same route, use the route with the shortest AS path as the preferred route if you are using eBGP, or use the local preference if you are using iBGP.
on
Globally turns BGP on.
off
Globally turns BGP off.
cur
Displays the current BGP configuration.
280 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/bgp/peer <peer number>
BGP Peer Configuration
[BGP Peer 1 Menu]
redist - Redistribution menu
addr - Set remote IP address
ras - Set remote autonomous system number
hold - Set hold time
alive - Set keep alive time
advert - Set min time between advertisements
retry - Set connect retry interval
orig - Set min time between route originations
ttl - Set time-to-live of IP datagrams
addi - Add rmap into in-rmap list
addo - Add rmap into out-rmap list
remi - Remove rmap from in-rmap list
remo - Remove rmap from out-rmap list
enable - Enable peer
disable - Disable peer
delete - Delete peer
cur - Display current peer configuration
This menu is used to configure BGP peers, which are border routers that exchange routing information with routers on internal and external networks. The peer option is disabled by default.
Table 6-81 BGP Peer Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer)
Command Syntax and Usage redist
Displays BGP Redistribution Menu. To view the menu options, see page 283
.
addr <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>
Defines the IP address for the specified peer (border router), using dotted decimal notation. The default address is 0.0.0.0.
ras <AS number (1-65535)>
Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer.
hold <hold time (0, 3-65535)>
Sets the period of time, in seconds, that will elapse before the peer session is torn down because the switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the peer. The default value is 180 seconds. alive <keep alive time (0-21845)>
Sets the keep-alive time for the specified peer, in seconds. The default value is 60 seconds.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 281
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-81 BGP Peer Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer)
Command Syntax and Usage advert <min adv time (1-65535)>
Sets time in seconds between advertisements.
retry <connect retry interval (1-65535)>
Sets connection retry interval, in seconds.
orig <min orig time (1-65535)>
Sets the minimum time between route originations, in seconds.
ttl <number of router hops (1-255)>
Time-to-live (TTL) is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet has been in the network too long and should be discarded. TTL specifies a certain time span in seconds that, when exhausted, would cause the packet to be discarded. The TTL is determined by the number of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded.
This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can make. This value is used to restrict the number of “hops” the advertisement makes. It is also used to support multi-hops, which allow BGP peers to talk across a routed network. The default number is set at 1.
addi <route map ID (1-32)>
Adds route map into in-route map list.
addo <route map ID (1-32)>
Adds route map into out-route map list.
remi <route map ID (1-32)>
Removes route map from in-route map list.
remo <route map ID (1-32)>
Removes route map from out-route map list.
ena
Enables this peer configuration.
dis
Disables this peer configuration.
del
Deletes this peer configuration.
cur
Displays the current BGP peer configuration.
282 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist
BGP Redistribution Configuration
[Redistribution Menu]
metric - Set default-metric of advertised routes
default - Set default route action
rip - Enable/disable advertising RIP routes
ospf - Enable/disable advertising OSPF routes
fixed - Enable/disable advertising fixed routes
static - Enable/disable advertising static routes
cur - Display current redistribution configuration
Table 6-82 BGP Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist)
Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-4294967294)>|none
Sets default metric of advertised routes.
default none|import|originate|redistribute
Sets default route action.
Defaults routes can be configured as import, originate, redistribute, or none.
None: No routes are configured
Import: Import these routes.
Originate: The switch sends a default route to peers if it does not have any default routes in its routing table.
Redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default gateway or learned through other protocols and redistributed to peer. If the routes are learned from default gateway configuration, you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes. Similarly, if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol, you have to enable that protocol in this redistribute submenu.
rip disable|enable
Enables or disables advertising RIP routes
ospf disable|enable
Enables or disables advertising OSPF routes.
fixed disable|enable
Enables or disables advertising fixed routes.
static disable|enable
Enables or disables advertising static routes.
current
Displays current redistribution configuration.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 283
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/bgp/aggr <aggregation number>
BGP Aggregation Configuration
[BGP Aggr 1 Menu]
addr - Set aggregation IP address
mask - Set aggregation network mask
enable - Enable aggregation
disable - Disable aggregation
delete - Delete aggregation
cur - Display current aggregation configuration
This menu enables you to configure BGP aggregation to specify the routes/range of IP destinations a peer router accepts from other peers. All matched routes are aggregated to one route, to reduce the size of the routing table. By default, the first aggregation number is enabled and the rest are disabled.
Table 6-83 BGP Aggregation Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/aggr)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>
Defines the starting subnet IP address for this aggregation, using dotted decimal notation. The default address is 0.0.0.0.
mask <IP subnet mask (such as, 255.255.255.0)>
This IP address mask is used with addr to define the range of IP addresses that will be aggregated to one route when the aggregation is enabled. The default address is 0.0.0.0.
ena
Enables this BGP aggregation.
dis
Disables this BGP aggregation.
del
Deletes this BGP aggregation.
cur
Displays the current BGP aggregation configuration.
284 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/igmp
IGMP Configuration
[IGMP Menu]
snoop - IGMP Snoop Menu
relay - IGMP Relay Menu
mrouter - Static Multicast Router Menu
igmpflt - IGMP Filtering Menu
adv - IGMP Advanced Menu
on - Globally turn IGMP ON
off - Globally turn IGMP OFF
cur - Display current IGMP configuration
describes the commands used to configure basic IGMP parameters.
Table 6-84 IGMP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp)
Command Syntax and Usage snoop
Displays the IGMP Snoop Menu. To view menu options, see
relay
Displays the IGMP Relay Menu. To view menu options, see
mrouter
Displays the Static Multicast Router Menu. To view menu options, see page 290
.
igmpflt
Displays the IGMP Filtering Menu. To view menu options, see
adv
Displays the IGMP Advanced Menu. To view menu options, see
. on
Globally turns IGMP on. off
Globally turns IGMP off. cur
Displays the current IGMP configuration parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 285
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop
IGMP Snooping Configuration
[IGMP Snoop Menu]
igmpv3 - IGMP Version3 Snoop Menu
mrto - Set multicast router timeout
aggr - Aggregate IGMP report
srcip - Set source ip to use when proxying GSQ
add - Add VLAN(s) to IGMP Snooping
rem - Remove VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping
clear - Remove all VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping
ena - Enable IGMP Snooping
dis - Disable IGMP Snooping
cur - Display current IGMP Snooping configuration
IGMP Snooping allows the switch to forward multicast traffic only to those ports that request it. IGMP snooping prevents multicast traffic from being flooded to all ports. The switch learns which server hosts are interested in receiving multicast traffic, and forwards it only to ports connected to those servers.
describes the commands used to configure IGMP Snooping.
Table 6-85 IGMP Snoop Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop)
Command Syntax and Usage igmpv3
Displays the IGMP version 3 Menu. To view menu options, see page 287
.
mrto <1-600 seconds>
Configures the timeout value for IGMP Membership Queries (mrouter). Once the timeout value is reached, the switch removes the multicast router from its IGMP table, if the proper conditions are met. The range is from 1 to 600 seconds. The default is 255 seconds.
aggr enable|disable
Enables or disables IGMP Membership Report aggregation. srcip <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Configures the source IP address used as a proxy for IGMP Group Specific Queries. add <VLAN number (1-4094)>
Adds the selected VLAN(s) to IGMP Snooping. rem <VLAN number (1-4094)>
Removes the selected VLAN(s) from IGMP Snooping. clear
Removes all VLANs from IGMP Snooping.
286 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-85 IGMP Snoop Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop)
Command Syntax and Usage ena
Enables IGMP Snooping. dis
Disables IGMP Snooping. cur
Displays the current IGMP Snooping parameters.
/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop/igmpv3
IGMP Version 3 Configuration
[IGMP V3 Snoop Menu]
sources - Set the number of sources to snoop in group record
v1v2 - Enable/disable snooping IGMPv1/v2 reports
exclude - Enable/disable snooping EXCLUDE mode reports
ena - Enable IGMPv3 Snooping
dis - Disable IGMPv3 Snooping
cur - Display current IGMP Snooping V3 configuration
describes the commands used to configure IGMP version 3.
Table 6-86 IGMP V3 Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop/igmpv3)
Command Syntax and Usage sources <1-64>
Configures the maximum number of IGMP multicast sources to snoop from within the group record. Use this command to limit the number of IGMP sources to provide more refined control. v1v2 enable|disable
Enables or disables snooping on IGMP version 1 and version 2 reports. When disabled, the switch drops IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports. The default value is enabled. exclude enable|disable
Enables or disables snooping on IGMPv3 Exclude Reports. When disabled, the switch ignores
Exclude Reports. The default value is enabled. ena
Enables IGMP version 3. The default value is disabled.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 287
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-86 IGMP V3 Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/snoop/igmpv3)
Command Syntax and Usage dis
Disables IGMP version 3. cur
Displays the current IGMP version 3 configuration.
/cfg/l3/igmp/relay
IGMP Relay Configuration
[IGMP Relay Menu]
mrtr - Upstream Multicast Router Menu
add - Add VLAN(s) to downstream
rem - Remove VLAN(s) from downstream
clear - Remove all VLAN(s) from downstream
report - Set unsolicited report interval
ena - Enable IGMP Relay
dis - Disable IGMP Relay
cur - Display current IGMP Relay configuration
describes the commands used to configure IGMP Relay.
Table 6-87 IGMP Relay Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/relay)
Command Syntax and Usage mrtr <multicast router number (1-2)>
Displays the Upstream Multicast Router Menu. To view menu options, see page 289
. add <VLAN number (1-4094)>
Adds the VLAN to the list of IGMP Relay VLANs. rem <VLAN number (1-4094)>
Removes the VLAN from the list of IGMP Relay VLANs. clear
Removes all VLANs from the list of IGMP Relay VLANs. report <0-150>
Configures the interval between unsolicited Join reports sent by the switch, in seconds.
The default value is 10. ena
Enables IGMP Relay.
288 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-87 IGMP Relay Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/relay)
Command Syntax and Usage dis
Disables IGMP Relay. cur
Displays the current IGMP Relay configuration.
/cfg/l3/igmp/mrtr < Mrouter number>
IGMP Relay Multicast Router Configuration
[Multicast router 2 Menu]
addr - Set IP address of multicast router
intr - Set interval between ping attempts
retry - Set number of failed attempts to declare router DOWN
restr - Set number of successful attempts to declare router UP
version - Set IGMP version
ena - Enable multicast router
dis - Disable multicast router
del - Delete multicast router
cur - Display current multicast router configuration
describes the commands used to configure the IGMP Relay multicast router.
Table 6-88 IGMP Relay Mrouter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/relay/mrtr)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as 224.0.1.0)>
Configures the IP address of the IGMP multicast router used for IGMP Relay. intr <1-60>
Configures the time interval between ping attempts to the upstream Mrouters, in seconds.
The default value is 2. retry <1-120>
Configures the number of failed ping attempts required before the switch declares this Mrouter is down. The default value is 4. restr <1-128>
Configures the number of successful ping attempts required before the switch declares this
Mrouter is up. The default value is 5. version <1-2>
Configures the IGMP version (1 or 2) of the multicast router.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 289
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-88 IGMP Relay Mrouter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/relay/mrtr)
Command Syntax and Usage ena
Enables the multicast router. dis
Disables the multicast router. del
Deletes the multicast router from IGMP Relay. cur
Displays the current IGMP Relay multicast router parameters.
/cfg/l3/igmp/mrouter
IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration
[Static Multicast Router Menu]
add - Add port as Multicast Router Port
rem - Remove port as Multicast Router Port
cur - Display current Multicast Router configuration
describes the commands used to configure a static multicast router.
N OTE – When you configure a static multicast router on a VLAN, the process of learning multicast routers is disabled for that VLAN.
Table 6-89 IGMP Static Multicast Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/mrouter)
Command Syntax and Usage add <port number> <VLAN number> <IGMP version number>
Selects a port/VLAN combination on which the static multicast router is connected, and configures the IGMP version (1, 2, or 3) of the multicast router. remove <port number> <VLAN number> <IGMP version number>
Removes a static multicast router from the selected port/VLAN combination. cur
Displays the current IGMP Static Multicast Router parameters.
290 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt
IGMP Filtering Configuration
[IGMP Filter Menu]
filter - IGMP Filter Definition Menu
port - IGMP Filtering Port Menu
ena - Enable IGMP Filtering
dis - Disable IGMP Filtering
cur - Display current IGMP Filtering configuration
describes the commands used to configure an IGMP filter.
Table 6-90 IGMP Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt)
Command Syntax and Usage filter <filter number (1-16)>
Displays the IGMP Filter Definition Menu. To view menu options, see page 292
.
port <port number>
Displays the IGMP Filtering Port Menu. To view menu options, see
ena
Enables IGMP filtering globally. dis
Disables IGMP filtering globally. cur
Displays the current IGMP Filtering parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 291
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/filter < filter number>
IGMP Filter Definition
[IGMP Filter 1 Definition Menu]
range - Set IP Multicast address range
action - Set filter action
ena - Enable filter
dis - Disable filter
del - Delete filter
cur - Display current IGMP filter configuration
describes the commands used to define an IGMP filter.
Table 6-91 IGMP Filter Definition Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/filter)
Command Syntax and Usage range <IP multicast address (such as 224.0.0.10)> <IP multicast address>
Configures the range of IP multicast addresses for this filter.
action allow|deny
Allows or denies multicast traffic for the IP multicast addresses specified. ena
Enables this IGMP filter. dis
Disables this IGMP filter. del
Deletes this filter’s parameter definitions. cur
Displays the current IGMP filter.
292 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/port < port alias or number>
IGMP Filtering Port Configuration
[IGMP Port EXT1 Menu]
filt - Enable/disable IGMP filtering on port
add - Add IGMP filter to port
rem - Remove IGMP filter from port
cur - Display current IGMP filtering Port configuration
describes the commands used to configure a port for IGMP filtering.
Table 6-92 IGMP Filter Port Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/igmpflt/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
filt enable|disable
Enables or disables IGMP filtering on this port. add <filter number (1-16)>
Adds an IGMP filter to this port. rem <filter number (1-16)>
Removes an IGMP filter from this port. cur
Displays the current IGMP filter parameters for this port.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 293
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/igmp/adv
IGMP Advanced Configuration
[IGMP Advanced Menu]
qintrval - Set IGMP query interval
robust - Set expected packet loss on subnet
timeout - Set report timeout
fastlv - Enable/disable Fastleave processing in VLAN
flood - Flood unregistered IPMC
cur - Display current IGMP Advanced configuration
describes the commands used to configure advanced IGMP parameters.
Table 6-93 IGMP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/l3/igmp/adv)
Command Syntax and Usage qinterval <1-600>
Configures the interval for IGMP Query Reports. The default value is 125 seconds. robust <2-10>
Configures the IGMP Robustness variable, which allows you to tune the switch for expected packet loss on the subnet. If the subnet is expected to be lossy (high rate of packet loss), increase the value. The default value is 2. timeout <1-255 seconds>
Configures the timeout value for IGMP Membership Reports (host). Once the timeout value is reached, the switch removes the host from its IGMP table, if the conditions are met. The range is from 1 to 255 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.
fastlv <VLAN number> disable|enable
Enables or disables Fastleave processing. Fastleave allows the switch to immediately remove a port from the IGMP port list, if the host sends a Leave message, and the proper conditions are met. This command is disabled by default.
flood enable|disable
Configures the switch to flood unregistered IP multicast reports to all ports. The default setting is enabled . cur
Displays the current IGMP Advanced parameters.
294 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/dns
Domain Name System Configuration
[Domain Name System Menu]
prima - Set IP address of primary DNS server
secon - Set IP address of secondary DNS server
dname - Set default domain name
cur - Display current DNS configuration
The Domain Name System (DNS) Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS servers on your local network, and for setting the default domain name served by the switch services. DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping , traceroute, and tftp commands.
Table 6-94 Domain Name Service Menu Options (/cfg/l3/dns)
Command Syntax and Usage prima <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>
You will be prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server. Use dotted decimal notation.
secon <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>
You will be prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server. If the primary DNS server fails, the configured secondary will be used instead. Enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation.
dname <dotted DNS notation>|none
Sets the default domain name used by the switch.
For example: mycompany.com
cur
Displays the current Domain Name System settings.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 295
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/bootp
Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration
[Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu]
addr - Set IP address of BOOTP server
addr2 - Set IP address of second BOOTP server
on - Globally turn BOOTP relay ON
off - Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF
cur - Display current BOOTP relay configuration
The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. The BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the GbE Switch Module .
BOOTP relay is turned off by default.
Table 6-95 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bootp)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as 192.4.17.101)>
Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server.
addr2 <IP address (such a 192.4.17.101)>
Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server.
on
Globally turns on BOOTP relay.
off
Globally turns off BOOTP relay.
cur
Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration.
296 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/vrrp
VRRP Configuration
[Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu]
vr - VRRP Virtual Router menu
group - VRRP Virtual Router Group menu
if - VRRP Interface menu
track - VRRP Priority Tracking menu
hotstan - Enable/disable hot-standby processing
on - Globally turn VRRP ON
off - Globally turn VRRP OFF
cur - Display current VRRP configuration
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on GbE Switch Module s provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.
By default, VRRP is disabled. Alteon OS has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as well, allowing for full active/active redundancy between switches. For more information on
VRRP, see the “High Availability” chapter in the Alteon OS Application Guide.
Table 6-96 VRRP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage vr <virtual router number (1-1024)>
Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu. This menu is used for configuring virtual routers on this
switch. To view menu options, see page 299
.
group
Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu, used to combine all virtual routers together as one logical entity. Group options must be configured when using two or more Alteon switches in a hotstandby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time. To view menu
.
if <interface number (1-127)>
Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu. To view menu options, see
track
Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu. This menu is used for weighting the criteria used when modifying priority levels in the master router election process. To view menu options, see
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 297
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-96 VRRP Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage
hotstan disable|enable
Enables or disables hot standby processing, in which two or more switches provide redundancy for each other. By default, this option is disabled.
on
Globally enables VRRP on this switch.
off
Globally disables VRRP on this switch.
cur
Displays the current VRRP parameters.
298 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>
Virtual Router Configuration
[VRRP Virtual Router 1 Menu]
track - Priority Tracking Menu
vrid - Set virtual router ID
addr - Set IP address
if - Set interface number
prio - Set renter priority
adver - Set advertisement interval
preem - Enable or disable preemption
ena - Enable virtual router
dis - Disable virtual router
del - Delete virtual router
cur - Display current VRRP virtual router configuration
This menu is used for configuring virtual routers for this switch. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.
Virtual routers are disabled by default.
Table 6-97 VRRP Virtual Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage track
Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router. Tracking is an Alteon OS proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. To view menu options, see
vrid <virtual router ID (1-1024)>
Defines the virtual router ID. This is used in conjunction with addr (below) to define a virtual router on this switch. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other, each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router: one that shares the same vrid and addr combination.
The vrid for virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 1024. The default value is 1.
All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface belongs.
addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. This is used in conjunction with the vrid (above) to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP device. The default address is 0.0.0.0.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 299
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-97 VRRP Virtual Router Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-127)>
Selects a switch IP interface. If the IP interface has the same IP address as the addr option above, this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router, even if it must preempt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. This preemption occurs even if the preem option below is disabled. The default value is 1.
prio <priority (1-254)>
Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. This can be any integer between 1 and 254.
The default value is 100.
During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest).
When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track), this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria.
adver <seconds (1-255)>
Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. The default value is 1.
preem disable|enable
Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if this virtual router is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. Note that even when preem is disabled, this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). By default, this option is enabled.
ena
Enables this virtual router.
dis
Disables this virtual router.
del
Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration.
cur
Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router.
300 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>/track
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration
[VRRP Virtual Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu]
vrs - Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers
ifs - Enable/disable tracking other interfaces
ports - Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports
cur - Display current VRRP virtual router configuration
This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met, the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see
).
Criteria are tracked dynamically, continuously updating virtual router priority levels when
enabled. If the virtual router preemption option (see preem in Table 6-97 on page 299 ) is
enabled, this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that of the current master.
Some tracking criteria (vrs, ifs, and ports below) apply to standard virtual routers, otherwise called “virtual interface routers.” A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address (addr) is the same as any configured virtual server IP address.
Table 6-98 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track)
Command Syntax and Usage
vrs disable|enable
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch, increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. This command is disabled by default.
ifs disable|enable
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is disabled by default.
ports disable|enable
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same
VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default.
cur
Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 301
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/vrrp/group
Virtual Router Group Configuration
[VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu]
track - Priority Tracking Menu
vrid - Set virtual router ID
if - Set interface number
prio - Set renter priority
adver - Set advertisement interval
preem - Enable or disable preemption
ena - Enable virtual router
dis - Disable virtual router
del - Delete virtual router
cur - Display current VRRP virtual router configuration
The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual router, which forces all virtual routers on the GbE Switch Module to either be master or backup as a group.
A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.
N OTE – This option is required to be configured only when using at least two GbE Switch Module s in a hot-standby failover configuration, where only one switch is active at any time .
Table 6-99 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group)
Command Syntax and Usage track
Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group. Tracking is an Alteon OS proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. To view menu options, see
vrid <virtual router ID (1-1024)>
Defines the virtual router ID.
The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 1024. All vrid values must be unique within the
VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface (see if below) belongs. The default virtual router
ID is 1.
if <interface number (1-127)>
Selects a switch IP interface. The default switch IP interface number is 1.
302 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-99 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group)
Command Syntax and Usage prio <priority (1-254)>
Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100.
During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest).
When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track), this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria.
adver <seconds (1-255)>
Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. The default is 1.
preem disable|enable
Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if the virtual router group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. Note that even when preem is disabled, this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). By default, this option is enabled.
ena
Enables the virtual router group.
dis
Disables the virtual router group.
del
Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration.
cur
Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 303
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track
Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration
[Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu]
ifs - Enable/disable tracking other interfaces
ports - Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports
cur - Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration
N OTE – If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled, then the tracking option will be available only under group option. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored.
Table 6-100 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track)
Command Syntax and Usage ifs disable |enable
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is disabled by default.
ports disable |enable
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same
VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default.
cur
Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.
304 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/vrrp/if <interface number>
VRRP Interface Configuration
N OTE – The interface-number (1 to 127) represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured.
[VRRP Interface 1 Menu]
auth - Set authentication types
passw - Set plain-text password
del - Delete interface
cur - Display current VRRP interface configuration
This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers.
Table 6-101 VRRP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/if)
Command Syntax and Usage
auth none|password
Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication), or password
(password authentication).
passw <password>
Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long. This password will be added to each
VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see auth above).
del
Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface. The IP interface itself is not deleted.
cur
Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 305
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/l3/vrrp/track
VRRP Tracking Configuration
[VRRP Tracking Menu]
vrs - Set priority increment for virtual router tracking
ifs - Set priority increment for IP interface tracking
ports - Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking
cur - Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration
This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router election process. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu”
on page 301 ), the priority level for the virtual router is
increased by an amount defined through this menu.
Table 6-102 VRRP Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track)
Command Syntax and Usage vrs <0-254>
Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on this switch. The default value is 2.
ifs <0-254>
Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on this switch. The default value is 2.
ports <0-254>
Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN.
The default value is 2.
cur
Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values.
N OTE – These priority tracking options only define increment values. These options do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router
Priority Tracking Menu (see
) are enabled.
306 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/qos
Quality of Service Configuration
[QOS Menu]
8021p - 802.1p Menu
dscp - Dscp Menu
Use the Quality of Service (QoS) menus to configure the 802.1p priority value and DiffServ
Code Point (DSCP) value of incoming packets. This allows you to differentiate between various types of traffic, and provide different priority levels.
Table 6-103 Quality of Service Menu Options (/cfg/qos)
Command Syntax and Usage
8021p
Displays 802.1p configuration menu. To view menu options, see page 308
. dscp
Displays DSCP configuration menu. To view menu options, see
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 307
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/qos/8021p
802.1p Configuration
[802.1p Menu]
priq - Set priority to COS queue mapping
qweight - Set weight to a COS queue
numcos - Set number of COS queue
cur - Display current 802.1p configuration
This feature provides the capability to filter IP packets based on the 802.1p bits in the packet's
VLAN header. The 802.1p bits specify the priority that you should give to the packets while forwarding them. The packets with a higher (non-zero) priority bits are given forwarding preference over packets with numerically lower priority bits value.
Table 6-104 802.1p Menu Options (/cfg/qos/8021p)
Command Syntax and Usage priq <0-7> <0-1>|<0-7>
Maps the 802.1p priority of to the Class of Service queue (COSq) priority. Enter the 802.1p priority value (0-7), followed by the Class of Service queue that handles the matching traffic. qweight <0-1>|<0-7> <0-15>
Configures the weight of the selected Class of Service queue (COSq). Enter the queue number, followed by the scheduling weight (0-15). numcos 2|8
Sets the number of Class of Service queues for switch ports. The default value is 2. You must apply, save, and reset the switch to activate the new configuration. cur
Displays the current 802.1p parameters.
308 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/qos/dscp
DSCP Configuration
[dscp Menu]
dscp - Remark DSCP value to a new DSCP value
prio - Remark DSCP value to a 802.1p priority
on - Globally turn DSCP remarking ON
off - Globally turn DSCP remarking OFF
cur - Display current DSCP remarking configuration
Use this menu map the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value of incoming packets to a new value, or to an 802.1p priority value.
Table 6-105 DSCP Menu Options (/cfg/qos/dscp)
Command Syntax and Usage dscp <0-63> <0-63>
Maps the initial DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value to a new value. Enter the DSCP value (0-63) of incoming packets, followed by the new value. prio <dscp (0-63)> <priority (0-7)>
Maps the DiffServ Code point value to an 802.1p priority value. Enter the DSCP value, followed by the corresponding 802.1p value. on
Turns on DSCP re-marking globally. off
Turns off DSCP re-marking globally. cur
Displays the current DSCP parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 309
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/acl
Access Control List Configuration
[ACL Menu]
acl - Access Control List Item Config Menu
block - Access Control List Block Config Menu
group - Access Control List Group Config Menu
cur - Display current ACL configuration
Use this menu to create Access Control Lists, ACL Blocks, and ACL Groups. ACLs define matching criteria used for IP filtering and Quality of Service functions.
Table 6-106 ACL Menu Options (/cfg/acl)
Command Syntax and Usage acl <1-4096>
Displays Access Control List configuration menu. To view menu options, see page 311 .
block <1-4096>
Displays ACL Block configuration menu. To view menu options, see page 316 .
group <1-4096>
Displays ACL Group configuration menu. To view menu options, see
cur
Displays the current ACL parameters.
310 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/acl/acl < ACL number>
ACL Configuration
[ACL 1 Menu]
ethernet - Ethernet Header Options Menu
ipv4 - IP Header Options Menu
tcpudp - TCP/UDP Header Options Menu
pktfmt - Set to filter specific packet format types
egrport - Set to filter for packets egressing this port
action - Set filter action
stats - Enable/disable statistics for this acl
reset - Reset filtering parameters
cur - Display current filter configuration
These menus allow you to define filtering criteria for each Access Control List (ACL).
Table 6-107 ACL Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x)
Command Syntax and Usage ethernet
Displays the ACL Ethernet Header menu. To view menu options, see page 312
. ipv4
Displays the ACL IP Header menu. To view menu options, see page 313 .
tcpudp
Displays the ACL TCP/UDP Header menu. To view menu options, see
pktfmt <packet format>
Displays the ACL Packet Format menu. To view menu options, see page 315
. egrport <port alias or number>
Configures the ACL to function on egress packets.
action permit|deny|setprio <0-7>
Configures a filter action for packets that match the ACL definitions. You can choose to permit
(pass) or deny (drop) packets, or set the 802.1p priority level (0-7).
stats e|d
Enables or disables the statistics collection for the Access Control List. reset
Resets the ACL parameters to their default values. cur
Displays the current ACL parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 311
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/acl/acl < ACL number>/ethernet
Ethernet Filtering Configuration
smac - Set to filter on source MAC
dmac - Set to filter on destination MAC
vlan - Set to filter on VLAN ID
etype - Set to filter on ethernet type
pri - Set to filter on priority
reset - Reset all fields
cur - Display current parameters
This menu allows you to define Ethernet matching criteria for an ACL.
Table 6-108 Ethernet Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/ethernet)
Command Syntax and Usage smac <MAC address (such as 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> <mask (FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF)>
Defines the source MAC address for this ACL. dmac <MAC address (such as 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> <mask (FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF)>
Defines the destination MAC address for this ACL. vlan <1-4095> <VLAN mask (0xfff)>
Defines a VLAN number and mask for this ACL.
etype ARP|IP|IPv6|MPLS|RARP|any|0xXXXX
Defines the Ethernet type for this ACL. pri <0-7>
Defines the Ethernet priority value for the ACL. reset
Resets Ethernet parameters for the ACL to their default values. cur
Displays the current Ethernet parameters for the ACL.
312 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/acl/acl < ACL number>/ipv4
IP version 4 Filtering Configuration
[Filtering IPv4 Menu]
sip - Set to filter on source IP address
dip - Set to filter on destination IP address
proto - Set to filter on prototype
tos - Set to filter on TOS
reset - Reset all fields
cur - Display current parameters
This menu allows you to define IPv4 matching criteria for an ACL.
Table 6-109 IP version 4 Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/ipv4)
Command Syntax and Usage sip <IP address> <mask (such as 255.255.255.0)>
Defines a source IP address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this source IP address will match this ACL. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.
dip <IP address> <mask (such as 255.255.255.0)>
Defines a destination IP address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this destination IP address will match this ACL. proto <0-255>
Defines an IP protocol for the ACL. If defined, traffic from the specified protocol matches this filter. Specify the protocol number. Listed below are some of the well-known protocols.
Number Name
1 icmp
2 igmp
6 tcp
17 udp
89 ospf
112 vrrp tos <0-255>
Defines a Type of Service value for the ACL. For more information on ToS, refer to RFC 1340 and
1349. reset
Resets the IPv4 parameters for the ACL to their default values. cur
Displays the current IPV4 parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 313
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/acl/acl < ACL number>/tcpudp
TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration
[Filtering TCP/UDP Menu]
sport - Set to filter on TCP/UDP source port
dport - Set to filter on TCP/UDP destination port
flags - Set to filter TCP/UDP flags
reset - Reset all fields
cur - Display current parameters
This menu allows you to define TCP/UDP matching criteria for an ACL.
Table 6-110 TCP/UDP Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/tcpudp)
Command Syntax and Usage sport <source port (1-65535)> <mask (0xFFFF)>
Defines a source port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will match this ACL. Specify the port number. Listed below are some of the well-known ports:
Number Name
20 ftp-data
21 ftp
22 ssh
23 telnet
25 smtp
37 time
42 name
43 whois
53 domain
69 tftp
70 gopher
79 finger
80 http dport <destination port (1-65535)> <mask (0xFFFF)>
Defines a destination port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or UDP destination port will match this ACL. Specify the port number, just as with sport above. flags <value (0x0-0x3f)>
Defines a TCP/UDP flag for the ACL.
314 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 6-110 TCP/UDP Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/tcpudp)
Command Syntax and Usage reset
Resets the TCP/UDP parameters for the ACL to their default values. cur
Displays the current TCP/UDP Filtering parameters.
/cfg/acl/acl < ACL number>/pktfmt
Packet Format Filtering Configuration
[Filtering Packet Format Menu]
ethfmt - Set to filter on ethernet format
tagfmt - Set to filter on ethernet tagging format
ipfmt - Set to filter on IP format
reset - Reset all fields
cur - Display current parameters
This menu allows you to define Packet Format matching criteria for an ACL.
Table 6-111 ACL Packet Format Filtering Menu Options (/cfg/acl/acl x/pktfmt)
Command Syntax and Usage
ethfmt eth2|SNAP|LLC
Defines the Ethernet format for the ACL.
tagfmt none|tagged
Defines the tagging format for the ACL.
ipfmt none|v4|v6
Defines the IP format for the ACL. reset
Resets Packet Format parameters for the ACL to their default values. cur
Displays the current Packet Format parameters for the ACL.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315
Alteon OS Command Reference
cfg/acl/block < ACL Block number>
ACL Block Menu
[ACL Block 1 Menu]
addacl - Add ACL item to block
remacl - Remove ACL item from block
cur - Display current ACL items in block
This menu allows you to compile one or more ACLs into an ACL Block. Each ACL in the
ACL Block must fall within the same mask.
Table 6-112 ACL Block Menu options (/cfg/acl/block x)
Command Syntax and Usage addac1 <1-4096>
Adds the selected ACL to the ACL Block. remac1 <1-4096>
Removes the selected ACL from the ACL Block. cur
Displays the current ACL block parameters.
316 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/acl/group < ACL Group number>
ACL Group Configuration
[ACL Group 1 Menu]
add - Add ACL to group
rem - Remove ACL from group
cur - Display current ACL items in group
This menu allows you to compile one or more ACLs into an ACL Group. Once you create an
ACL Group, you can assign the ACL Group to one or more ports.
Table 6-113 ACL Group Menu Options (/cfg/acl/group x)
Command Syntax and Usage add acl <1-4096>
Adds the selected ACL to the ACL Group. rem acl <1-4096>
Removes the selected ACL from the ACL Group. cur
Displays the current ACL group parameters.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 317
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/pmirr
Port Mirroring Configuration
[Port Mirroring Menu]
mirror - Enable/Disable Mirroring
monport - Monitoring Port based PM Menu
cur - Display All Mirrored and Monitoring Ports
Port mirroring is disabled by default. For more information about port mirroring on the
GbE Switch Module, see “Appendix A: Troubleshooting” in the Alteon OS Application Guide.
N OTE – Traffic on VLAN 4095 is not mirrored to the external ports.
The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure, enable, and disable the monitored port. When enabled, network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port. By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port, you can collect detailed information about your network performance and usage.
Table 6-114 Port Mirroring Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr)
Command Syntax and Usage
mirror disable|enable
Enables or disables port mirroring monport <port alias or number>
Displays port-mirroring menu. To view menu options, see
cur
Displays current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports.
318 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/pmirr/monport
Port-Mirroring Configuration
[Port EXT1 Menu]
add - Add "Mirrored" port and VLANs
rem - Rem "Mirrored" port and VLANs
delete - Delete this "Monitor" port
cur - Display current Port Mirroring configuration
Table 6-115 Port Mirroring Monitor Port Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr/monport)
Command Syntax and Usage add <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <direction (in, out, or both)>
Adds the port to be mirrored. This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic. It is necessary to specify the direction because:
If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress), the frame is sent to the mirrored port.
If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or both, the frame is sent to the monitoring port. rem <mirrored port (port to mirror from)>
Removes the mirrored port. delete
Deletes this monitor port.
cur
Displays the current settings of the monitoring port.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 319
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/setup
Setup
The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time, BOOTP, IP, Spanning Tree, port speed/mode, VLAN parameters, and IP interfaces.
To start the setup program, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# setup
For a complete description of how to use setup, see Chapter 2, “First-Time Configuration .”
/cfg/dump
Dump
The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. To start the dump program, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# dump
The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. The screen display can be captured, edited, and placed in a script file, which can be used to configure other switches through a Telnet connection. When using Telnet to configure a new switch, paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP, as described on
320 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/cfg/ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename>
Saving the Active Switch Configuration
When the ptcfg command is used, the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the TFTP server. To start the switch configuration upload, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename>
Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the name of the target script configuration file.
N OTE – The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot be viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad).
N OTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified ptcfg file must exist prior to executing the ptcfg command and must be writable (set with proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration data.
/cfg/gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename>
Restoring the Active Switch Configuration
When the gtcfg command is used, the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the specified configuration file. The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial switch configuration. The configuration loaded using gtcfg is not activated until the apply command is used. If the apply command is found in the configuration script file loaded using this command, the apply action will be performed automatically.
To start the switch configuration download, at the Configuration# prompt, enter:
Configuration# gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename>
Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the name of the target script configuration file.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 321
Alteon OS Command Reference
322 Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 40M2420, April 2007
C HAPTER 7
The Operations Menu
The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immediately, but do not alter permanent switch configurations. For example, you can use the Operations Menu to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change), with the understanding that when the switch is reset, the port returns to its normally configured operation.
40M2420, April 2007 323
Alteon OS Command Reference
/oper
Operations Menu
[Operations Menu]
port - Operational Port Menu
vrrp - Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu
ip - Operational IP Menu
passwd - Change current user password
clrlog - Clear syslog messages
conlog - Enable/Disable Session Console Logging
cfgtrk - Track last config change made
ntpreq - Send NTP request
The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics without affecting switch configuration.
Table 7-1 Operations Menu (/oper)
Command Syntax and Usage port <port alias or number>
Displays the Operational Port Menu. To view menu options, see
vrrp
Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu. To view menu options, see
ip
Displays the IP Operations Menu, which has one sub-menu/option, the Operational Border Gate-
way Protocol Menu. To view menu options, see page 328
.
passwd <15 char max>
Allows the user to change the password. You need to enter the current password in use for validation.
clrlog
Clears all Syslog messages. conlog enable|disable
Enables of disables console logging of the current session. cfgtrk
Displays a list of configuration changes made since the last apply command. Each time the apply command is sent, the configuration-tracking log is cleared. ntpreq
Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server.
324 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/oper/port <port alias or number>
Operations-Level Port Options
[Operations Port INT1 Menu]
8021x - 8021.x Menu
ena - Enable port
dis - Disable port
cur - Current port state
Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port, and for resetting the port.
Table 7-2 Operations-Level Port Menu Options (/oper/port)
Command Syntax and Usage
8021x
Displays the 802.1x Port Menu. To view menu options, see page 326
.
ena
Temporarily enables the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset.
dis
Temporarily disables the port. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset.
cur
Displays the current settings for the port.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu 325
Alteon OS Command Reference
/oper/port <port alias or number>/8021x
Operations-Level Port 802.1x Options
[802.1x Operation Menu]
reset - Reinitialize 802.1x access control on this port
reauth - Initiate reauthentication on this port now
Operations-level port 802.1x options are used to temporarily set 802.1x parameters for a port.
Table 7-3 Operations-Level Port 802.1x Menu Options (/oper/port x/8021x)
Command Syntax and Usage reset
Re-initializes the 802.1x access-control parameters for the port. The following actions take place, depending on the 802.1x port configuration:
force unauth - the port is placed in unauthorized state, and traffic is blocked. auto - the port is placed in unauthorized state, then authentication is initiated. force auth - the port is placed in authorized state, and authentication is not required. reauth
Re-authenticates the supplicant (client) attached to the port. This command only applies if the port’s 802.1x mode is configured as auto.
326 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/oper/vrrp
Operations-Level VRRP Options.
[VRRP Operations Menu]
back - Set virtual router to backup
Table 7-4 Operations-Level VRRP Menu Options (/oper/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage
back <virtual router number (1-1024)>
Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode. This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure. When this command is executed, the current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest). After the new election, the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases:
This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same)
This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled.
There are no other virtual routers available to take master control.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu 327
Alteon OS Command Reference
/oper/ip
Operations-Level IP Options
[IP Operations Menu]
bgp - Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu
Table 7-5 Operations-Level IP Menu Options (/oper/ip)
Command Syntax and Usage bgp
Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu. To view the menu options see page 328
.
/oper/ip/bgp
Operations-Level BGP Options
[Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu]
start - Start peer session
stop - Stop peer session
current - Current BGP operational state
Table 7-6 Operations-Level BGP Menu Options (/oper/ip/bgp)
Command Syntax and Usage start <peer number (1-16)>
Starts the peer session. stop <peer number (1-16)>
Stops the peer session. cur
Displays the current BGP operational state.
328 Chapter 7: The Operations Menu 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
C HAPTER 8
The Boot Options Menu
To use the Boot Options Menu, you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator. The
Boot Options Menu provides options for:
Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset
Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset
Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via FTP/TFTP
In addition to the Boot Menu, you can use a Web browser or SNMP to work with switch image
329
Alteon OS Command Reference
/boot
Boot Menu
[Boot Options Menu]
sched - Scheduled Switch Reset Menu
image - Select software image to use on next boot
conf - Select config block to use on next boot
mode - Select CLI mode to use on next boot
prompt - Prompt for selectable boot mode
gtimg - Download new software image via TFTP
ptimg - Upload selected software image via TFTP
reset - Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree]
cur - Display current boot options
Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections.
Scheduled Reboot of the Switch
This feature allows the switch administrator to schedule a reboot to occur at a particular time in future. This feature is particularly helpful if the user needs to perform switch upgrades during off-peak hours. You can set the reboot time, cancel a previously scheduled reboot, and check the time of the currently set reboot schedule with the help of the following sub-menu:
/boot/sched
Scheduled Reboot Menu
[Boot Schedule Menu]
set - Set switch reset time
cancel - Cancel pending switch reset
cur - Display current switch reset schedule
330 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Updating the Switch Software Image
The switch software image is the executable code running on the GbE Switch Module . A version of the image ships with the switch, and comes pre-installed on the device. As new versions of the image are released, you can upgrade the software running on your switch. To get the latest version of software available for your GbE Switch Module, go to: http://www.ibm.com/pc/support
Click on software updates. Use the /boot/cur command to determine the current software version.
The typical upgrade process for the software image consists of the following steps:
Place the new image onto a FTP or TFTP server on your network, or on a local computer.
Transfer the new image to your switch.
Select the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is reset.
Loading New Software to Your Switch
The switch can store up to two different software images, called image1 and image2, as well as boot software, called boot. When you load new software, you must specify where it should be placed: either into image1, image2, or boot.
For example, if your active image is currently loaded into image1, you would probably load the new image software into image2. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image (stored in image1), if needed.
Using the BBI
You can use the Browser-Based Interface to load software onto the GbESM. The software image to load can reside in one of the following locations:
FTP server
TFTP server
Local computer
After you log onto the BBI, perform the following steps to load a software image:
1.
Click the Configure context button in the toolbar.
2.
In the Navigation Window, select System > Config/Image Control.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 331
Alteon OS Command Reference
The Switch Image and Configuration Management page appears.
3.
If you are loading software from your computer (HTTP client), go to step 4.
If you are loading software from a FTP/TFTP server, enter the server’s information in the FTP/TFTP Settings section.
4.
In the Image Settings section, select the image version you want to replace (Image for
Transfer).
If you are loading software from a FTP/TFTP server, enter the file name and
click Get Image.
If you are loading software from your computer, click Browse.
In the File Upload Dialog, select the file and click OK.
Click Download via Browser.
Once the image has loaded, the page refreshes to show the new software.
332 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Using the AOS CLI
To load a new software image to your switch, you need the following:
The image or boot software loaded on a FTP/TFTP server on your network
The hostname or IP address of the FTP/TFTP server
The name of the new software image or boot file
N OTE – The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. See
System Configuration” on page 295 .
When the above requirements are met, use the following procedure to download the new software to your switch.
1.
At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# gtimg
2.
Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced:
Enter name of switch software image to be replaced
["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image>
3.
Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP or TFTP server.
Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: <name or IP address>
4.
Enter the name of the new software file on the server.
Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: <filename>
The exact form of the name will vary by server. However, the file location is normally relative to the FTP or TFTP directory (usually /tftpboot).
5.
Enter your username for the server, if applicable.
Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server:
<username> or <Enter>
The system prompts you to confirm your request.
You should next select a software image to run, as described below.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 333
Alteon OS Command Reference
Selecting a Software Image to Run
You can select which software image (image1 or image2) you want to run in switch memory for the next reboot.
1.
At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# image
2.
Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot.
The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset, and prompts you to enter a new choice:
Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset.
Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]:
334 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch
You can upload a software image from the switch to a FTP or TFTP server.
1.
At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# ptimg
2.
The system prompts you for information. Enter the desired image:
Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded
["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image> <hostname or server-IP-addr> <server-filename>
3.
Enter the name or the IP address of the FTP or TFTP server:
Enter hostname or IP address of FTP/TFTP server: <name or IP address>
4.
Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the FTP or TFTP server:
Enter name of file on FTP/TFTP server: <filename>
5.
The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered. To have the file uploaded, enter Y.
image2 currently contains Software Version 1.3.0
Upload will transfer image2 (1889411 bytes) to file "test"
on TFTP server 192.1.1.1.
Confirm upload operation [y/n]: y
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 335
Alteon OS Command Reference
Selecting a Configuration Block
When you make configuration changes to the GbE Switch Module , you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset. When you perform the save command, your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block. The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block.
There is also a factory configuration block. This holds the default configuration set by the factory when your GbE Switch Module was manufactured. Under certain circumstances, it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default. This can be useful when a custom-configured
GbE Switch Module is moved to a network environment where it will be re configured for a different purpose.
Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is reset:
1.
At the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
Boot Options# conf
2.
Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use:
The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset, and prompts you to enter a new choice:
Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset.
Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]:
336 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Resetting the Switch
You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur.
N OTE – Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Group to restart. This process can be lengthy, depending on the topology of your network.
N OTE – Resetting the switch causes the date and time to revert to default values.
Use /cfg/sys/date and /cfg/sys/time to reenter the current date and time.
To reset the switch, at the Boot Options# prompt, enter:
>> Boot Options# reset
You are prompted to confirm your request.
Accessing the ISCLI
The default command-line interface for the GbESM is the Alteon OS CLI. To access the
ISCLI, enter the following command and reset the GbESM:
Main# boot/mode iscli
To access the Alteon OS CLI, enter the following command from the ISCLI and reload the
GbESM:
Router(config)# boot cli-mode aos
Users can select the CLI mode upon login, if the /boot/prompt command is enabled. Only an administrator connected through the console port can view and enable /boot/prompt.
When /boot/prompt is enabled, the first user to log in can select the CLI mode. Subsequent users must use the selected CLI mode, until all users have logged out.
Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 337
Alteon OS Command Reference
338 Chapter 8: The Boot Options Menu 40M2420, April 2007
C HAPTER 9
The Maintenance Menu
The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database information. It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting.
40M2420, April 2007 339
Alteon OS Command Reference
/maint
Maintenance Menu
N OTE – To use the Maintenance Menu, you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.
[Maintenance Menu]
sys - System Maintenance Menu
fdb - Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu
debug - Debugging Menu
arp - ARP Cache Manipulation Menu
route - IP Route Manipulation Menu
igmp - IGMP Multicast Group Menu
uudmp - Uuencode FLASH dump
ptdmp - Upload FLASH dump via FTP/TFTP
ptfile - Upload FLASH dump via FTP/TFTP
cldmp - Clear FLASH dump
panic - Dump state information to FLASH and reboot
tsdmp - Tech support dump
pttsdmp - Upload tech support dump via FTP/TFTP
Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the
GbE Switch Module after any one of the following occurs:
The switch administrator forces a switch panic. The panic option, found in the Maintenance Menu, causes the switch to dump state information to flash memory, and then causes the switch to reboot.
The watchdog timer forces a switch reset. The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot the switch if the switch software freezes.
The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot.
Table 9-1 Maintenance Menu (/maint)
Command Syntax and Usage sys
Displays the System Maintenance Menu. To view menu options, see page 342
.
fdb
Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see
.
debug
Displays the Debugging Menu. To view menu options, see page 344
.
340 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 9-1 Maintenance Menu (/maint)
Command Syntax and Usage arp
Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see
route
Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu. To view menu options, see
igmp
Displays the IGMP Maintenance Menu. To view menu options, see page 347
.
uudmp
Displays dump information in uuencoded format. For details, see
ptdmp <host name> <file name> [-mgmt|-data]
Saves the system dump information via TFTP. For details, see
ptfile
Uploads a specified file from switch the root file system to a FTP/TFTP server. cldmp
Clears dump information from flash memory. For details, see
panic
Dumps MP information to FLASH and reboots. For details, see page 351
.
tsdmp
Dumps all GbE Switch Module information, statistics, and configuration.You can log the tsdump output into a file. pttsdmp
Redirects the technical support dump (tsdmp) to an external TFTP server.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 341
Alteon OS Command Reference
/maint/sys
System Maintenance
This menu is reserved for use by IBM Service Support. The options are used to perform system debugging.
[System Maintenance Menu]
flags - Set NVRAM flag word
Table 9-2 System Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/sys)
Command Syntax and Usage flags <new NVRAM flags word as 0xXXXXXXXX>
This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Tech support group.
342 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/maint/fdb
Forwarding Database Maintenance
[FDB Manipulation Menu]
find - Show a single FDB entry by MAC address
port - Show FDB entries for a single port
trunk - Show FDB entries for a single trunk
vlan - Show FDB entries for a single VLAN
dump - Show all FDB entries
clear - Clear entire FDB, then re-add static entries
The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a
MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database. This is helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions.
Table 9-3 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb)
Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>]
Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. Enter the MAC address using the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format (such as
08:00:20:12:34:56 ) or xxxxxxxxxxxx format (such as 080020123456).
port <port alias or number>
Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. trunk <Trunk Group number>
Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. vlan <VLAN number (1-4095)>
Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.
dump
Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. For details, see page 77 .
clear
Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 343
Alteon OS Command Reference
/maint/debug
Debugging Options
[Miscellaneous Debug Menu]
tbuf - Show MP trace buffer
snap - Show MP snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer
clrcfg - Clear all flash configs
The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding switch operation. You can view the following information using the debug menu:
Events traced by the Management Processor (MP)
Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs
If the switch resets for any reason, the MP trace buffer is saved into the snap trace buffer area.
The output from these commands can be interpreted by IBM Service Support.
Table 9-4 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug)
Command Syntax and Usage tbuf
Displays the Management Processor trace buffer. Header information similar to the following is shown:
MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 25, 2001; mask: 0x2ffdf748
The buffer information is displayed after the header.
snap
Displays the Management Processor snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer. This buffer contains information traced at the time that a reset occurred.
clrcfg
Deletes all flash configuration blocks.
344 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/maint/arp
ARP Cache Maintenance
[Address Resolution Protocol Menu]
find - Show a single ARP entry by IP address
port - Show ARP entries on a single port
vlan - Show ARP entries on a single VLAN
addr - Show ARP entries for switch's interfaces
dump - Show all ARP entries
clear - Clear ARP cache
Table 9-5 ARP Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/arp)
Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Shows a single ARP entry by IP address.
port <port alias or number>
Shows ARP entries on a single port.
vlan <VLAN number>
Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN.
addr
Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests.
dump
Shows all ARP entries.
clear
Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory.
N OTE – To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch, or a portion according to one of the options listed on the menu above (find, port, vlan, dump), you can also refer to “ARP
Information” on
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 345
Alteon OS Command Reference
/maint/route
IP Route Manipulation
[IP Routing Menu]
find - Show a single route by destination IP address
gw - Show routes to a single gateway
type - Show routes of a single type
tag - Show routes of a single tag
if - Show routes on a single interface
dump - Show all routes
clear - Clear route table
Table 9-6 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route)
Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)>
Shows a single route by destination IP address.
gw <default gateway address (such as, 192.4.17.44)>
Shows routes to a default gateway.
type indirect |direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast
Shows routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see
tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|multicast
Shows routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing tags, see Table 4-22 on page 97
if <interface number (1-128)>
Shows routes on a single interface.
dump
Shows all routes.
clear
Clears the route table from switch memory.
N OTE
– To display all routes, you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page 95
.
346 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/maint/igmp
IGMP Maintenance
[IGMP Multicast Group Menu]
group - Multicast Group Menu
mrouter - IGMP Multicast Router Port Menu
clear - Clear group and mrouter tables
Table 9-7 describes the IGMP Maintenance commands.
Table 9-7 IGMP Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp)
Command Syntax and Usage group
Displays the Multicast Group menu. To view menu options, see
mrouter
Displays the Multicast Router Port menu. To view menu options, see
clear
Clears the IGMP group table and Mrouter tables.
/maint/igmp/group
IGMP Group Maintenance
[IGMP Multicast Group Menu]
find - Show a single group by IP group address
vlan - Show groups on a single vlan
port - Show groups on a single port
trunk - Show groups on a single trunk
detail - Show detail of a single group by IP address
dump - Show all groups
clear - Clear group tables
Table 9-7 describes the IGMP Maintenance commands.
Table 9-8 IGMP Multicast Group Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp/group)
Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address>
Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address. vlan <VLAN number>
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 347
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 9-8 IGMP Multicast Group Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp/group)
Command Syntax and Usage port <Port number or alias>
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port.
trunk <Trunk Group number>
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group.
detail <IP address>
Displays detailed information about a single IGMP multicast group. dump
Displays information for all multicast groups. clear
Clears the IGMP group tables.
/maint/igmp/mrouter
IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance
[IGMP Multicast Routers Menu]
vlan - Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan
dump - Show all multicast router ports
clear - Clear multicast router port table
Table 9-7 describes the IGMP multicast router (Mrouter) maintenance commands.
Table 9-9 IGMP Mrouter Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/igmp/mrouter)
Command Syntax and Usage vlan <VLAN number>
Shows all IGMP multicast router ports on a single VLAN. dump
Shows all multicast router ports. clear
Clears the IGMP Multicast Router port table.
348 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/maint/uudmp
Uuencode Flash Dump
Using this command, dump information is presented in uuencoded format. This format makes it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters.
If you want to capture dump information to a file, set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmp command. This will ensure that you do not lose any information. Once entered, the uudmp command will cause approximately
23,300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file.
Using the uudmp command, dump information can be read multiple times. The command does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory.
N OTE – Dump information is not cleared automatically. In order for any subsequent dump information to be written to flash memory, you must manually clear the dump region. For more
information on clearing the dump region, see page 350 .
To access dump information, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# uudmp
The dump information is displayed on your screen and, if you have configured your communication software to do so, captured to a file. If the dump region is empty, the following appears:
No FLASH dump available.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 349
Alteon OS Command Reference
/maint/ptdmp <server> <filename>
TFTP System Dump Put
Use this command to put (save) the system dump to a TFTP server.
N OTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system, the specified ptdmp file must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command, and must be writable (set with proper permission, and not locked by any application). The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data.
To save dump information via TFTP, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# ptdmp <server> <filename>
Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname, and filename is the target dump file.
/maint/cldmp
Clearing Dump Information
To clear dump information from flash memory, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# cldmp
The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message:
FLASH dump region cleared.
If the flash dump region is already clear, the switch displays the following message:
FLASH dump region is already clear.
350 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
/maint/panic
Panic Command
The panic command causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash memory and automatically reboot.
To select panic, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
>> Maintenance# panic
A FLASH dump already exists.
Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot [y/n]:
Enter y to confirm the command:
Confirm dump and reboot [y/n]: y
The following messages are displayed:
Starting system dump...done.
Rebooted because of PANIC command.
Booting complete 0:01:01 Tue Mar 14, 2007:
Version 1.3.0 from FLASH image1, active config block.
No POST errors (0xff).
Production Mode.
Unscheduled System Dumps
If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory, the following message is displayed when you log on to the switch:
Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. The dump was saved at 13:43:22 Tuesday March 14, 2007. Use /maint/uudmp to extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to clear the FLASH region. The region must be cleared before another dump can be saved.
40M2420, April 2007 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 351
Alteon OS Command Reference
352 Chapter 9: The Maintenance Menu 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
A PPENDIX A
Alteon OS Syslog Messages
The following syntax is used when outputting syslog messages:
<Time stamp><Log Label>Web OS<Thread ID>:<Message> where
<Timestamp>
The time of the message event is displayed in month day hour:minute:second format. For example: Aug 19 14:20:30
<Log Label>
The following types of log messages are recorded: LOG_EMERG, LOG_ALERT,
LOG_CRIT , LOG_ERR, LOG_WARNING, LOG_NOTICE, LOG_INFO, and LOG_DEBUG
<Thread ID>
This is the software thread that reports the log message. The following thread IDs are recorded: stg, ip, console, telnet, vrrp, system, web server, ssh, and bgp
<Message>: The log message
Following is a list of potential syslog messages. To keep this list as short as possible, only
<Thread ID> and <Message> are shown. The messages are sorted by <Log Label>.
Where the <Thread ID> is listed as mgmt, one of the following may be shown: console, telnet , web server, or ssh.
LOG_WARNING
FILTER “filter <filter number> fired on port <port number>, <source IP address> -> <desti-
nation IP address>, [<ICMP type>], [<IP protocol>], [<TCP f1ags>]”
353
Alteon OS Command Reference
LOG_ALERT
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
IP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
Own BPDU received from port <port_id>
STG <stg>, topology change detected
CIST topology change detected
STG <stg>, new root bridge
CIST new root bridge
Cannot contact default gateway <ip_address>
Received errored advertisement from <ip_address>
Received incorrect password from <ip_address>
Received incorrect addresses from <ip_address>
Received incorrect advertisement interval <seconds> from <ip_address>
Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address>
Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> was blocked
BGP
SFP
SFP
SFP
Session with <BGP peer ip_address> failed (<reason>)
Inserted at port EXT<num> is UNAPPROVED! Port is DISABLED.
Removed at port EXT<num>
Inserted at port EXT<num>
354 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
LOG_CRITICAL
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SFP
SSH
SSH
SSH
SYSTEM
SFP
SFP
SFP
Can't allocate memory in load_MP_INT
Currently not enough resource for loading RSA private key
Currently not enough resource for loading RSA public key
Temperature exceeds threshold
Failed to Read SFP ID for port EXT<num>
Failed to Select SFP for port EXT<num> ID
Voltage (<volt>) is UNDER Range on port EXT<num>. Port is DISABLED
Voltage (<volt>) is OVER Range on port EXT<num>
Failed to Read SFP Voltage|Temperature for port EXT<num>
Failed to Select SFP for port EXT<num> voltage|temperature.
Temperature (<temp>) is UNDER|OVER Range on port EXT<num>
Poll SFP Failed to get SFP Status
Inserted at port EXT<num> has I2C FAILURE! Port is DISABLED.
TX Fault on port EXT<num>. Port is DISABLED.
40M2420, April 2007 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 355
Alteon OS Command Reference
LOG_ERROR
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
MGMT
MGMT
CLI
CLI
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
NTP
NTP
STP
STP
MGMT
PANIC at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id>
VERIFY at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id>
ASSERT at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id>
Cannot contact <primary|secondary> NTP server <ip_address>
Unable to listen to NTP port
Error: Error writing STG config to FLASH
Error: Error writing config to FLASH
Apply not done
Save not done
<apply|save|diff> is issued by another user. Try later.
Error: Error writing %s config to FLASH
New Path Cost for Port <port_id> is invalid
PVID <vlan_id> for port <port_id> is not created
RADIUS secret must be 1-32 characters long
Please configure primary RADIUS server address
STP changes can't be applied since STP is OFF
Trunk group <trunk_id> contains ports with different PVIDs
Trunk group <trunk_id> has more than <max_trunk_ports> ports
Trunk group <trunk_id> contains no ports but is enabled
Not all ports in trunk group <trunk_id> are in VLAN <vlan_id>
Trunk groups <trunk_id> and <trunk_id> can not share the same port
356 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
LOG_ERROR (continued)
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
PORT_MIRR
CLI
CLI
MGMT
MGMT
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
Port Mirroring changes are not applied
Broadcast address for IP interface <interface_id> is invalid
IP Interfaces <interface_id> and <interface_id> are on the same subnet
Unapplied changes reverted
Unsaved changes reverted
SNMP source trap interface <IF> is not enabled
Password already taken
Radius is already turned ON
Cannot ena/dis primary admin user
Cannot change primary admin COS
Cannot change primary admin username
Cannot delete primary admin
Error: Enabled user <user> has no username
Error: Enabled user <user> has no password
New combination of Bridge Timers for STG <group> is invalid
Need maxage <= 2*(frwd-1) and maxage >= 2*(hello+1)
Multiple VLAN members in non default STG <group>
Duplicate VLAN members in STGs <gr1> and <gr2>
VRRP hot-standby port (<port>) is part of a STG (<group>) with STP turned on
Error writing active config to FLASH!
- Another save is in progress -OR-
- Configuration is too large -OR-
- Unknown error
40M2420, April 2007 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 357
Alteon OS Command Reference
LOG_ERROR (continued)
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
A previous apply is being executed. Try later.
RADIUS secret must be 1-<len> characters long
Please configure primary RADIUS server address.
TACACS+ secret must be 1-<len> characters long
Please configure primary TACACS+ server address.
Port Mirroring changes are not applied cfg_sync_tx_putsn: ABORTED
Synchronization RX connection RESET.
Synchronization RX connection TIMEOUT.
Synchronization RX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE.
Synchronization RX connection UNREACHABLE.
Synchronization TX Error.
Synchronization TX connection RESET.
Synchronization TX connection TIMEOUT.
Synchronization TX connection UNREACHABLE.
Synchronization TX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE.
Synchronization connection RCLOSE by peer.
Synchronization connection Wait-For-Close Timeout.
Synchronization connection Transmit Timeout.
Synchronization Receive Timeout
358 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
LOG_ERROR (continued)
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
Synchronization Receive UNKNOWN Timeout
Sync receive in progress ... cannot start Sync
Sync already in progress ... cannot start Sync
Config Sync route find error.
Config Sync tcp_open error.
Config Synchronization Timeout - Resuming Console thread
New configuration did not validate (rc=<code>)
New configuration did not apply (rc=<code>)
Sync config apply error.
Attempting to redirect a previously redirected input
Sync rx tcp open Error
Sync Version/Password Failed-No Version/Password Line
Sync Version Failed - peer:<host> config:<version>
Sync Password Failed-Bad Password
Sync of switches of different hardware types is not supported
Synchronization connection RCLOSE before RX.
Sync transmit already in progress ... cannot start Sync
Sync receive in progress ... cannot start Sync
Sync receive already in progress ... cannot start Sync receive
Sync transmit in progress ... cannot start Sync receive
40M2420, April 2007 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 359
Alteon OS Command Reference
LOG_ERROR (continued)
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
CLI
CLI
CLI
CLI
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
CLI
Multiple static routes have same destination
Virtual router <vr_id> must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled
Virtual router group must be enabled when hotstandby is enabled
At least one virtual router must be enabled when group is enabled
Virtual router group must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled
Virtual router group must have pre-emption enabled when hotstandby is enabled
Virtual router <vr_id> must have an IP address
Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same VRID and VLAN as <vlan_id>
Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same IP address as <ip_address>
Virtual router <vr_id> corresponding virtual server <server_id> is not enabled
Duplicate default entry
BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> must have an IP address
BGP peers <bgp_peer_id> and <bgp_peer_id> have same address
BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> have same address as IP interface
<ip_interface_id>
BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> IP interface <ip_interface_id> is not enabled
LOG_NOTICE
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
Rebooted <last_reset_information>
Rebooted <last_reset_information> administrator logged in
Enable auto negotiation for copper GIG port: <port>
Change fiber GIG port <port> mode to full duplex
Change fiber GIG port <port> speed to 1000
Boot config block changed
Boot image changed
Switch reset from CLI
Syslog host changed to <ip_address>
Syslog host changed to this host
360 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
LOG_NOTICE (continued)
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
Second syslog host changed to <ip_address>
Second syslog host changed to this host
Next boot will use active config block
User password changed
Operator password changed
Administrator password changed
RADIUS server timeouts
Failed login attempt via TELNET from host %s
Failed login attempt via the CONSOLE
PASSWORD FIX-UP MODE IN USE
<login_level> login on Console
" <login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console"
" <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from"
Administrator logout from BBI
<login_level> login from host <ip_address>
System clock set to <time>
PANIC command from CLI
Switch reset scheduled at <time>
Switch reset at <time> has been cancelled
Scheduled switch reboot
40M2420, April 2007 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 361
Alteon OS Command Reference
LOG_NOTICE (continued)
IP
IP
SSH
SSH
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
VLAN
PORT_MIRR
PORT_MIRR
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
<mins> minutes until scheduled reboot
Password for <user> changed by <user>, notifying admin to save.
Temperature OK
Default VLAN can not be deleted
" default gateway <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled"">"
Default gateway <ip_address> operational scp <login_level> login
" scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">"
Port mirroring is enabled
Port mirroring is disabled
Management Port enabled/disabled state can only be controlled by Management Module.
Management Port can only be enabled/disabled by the Management
Module
Cannot change the Management IP Interface VLAN
Cannot enable/disable the Management IP Interface
Cannot enable/disable forwarding on Management IP Interface
Cannot delete the Management IP Interface
Management VLAN can not be disabled
Default VLAN can not be deleted
Management VLAN can not be deleted
Management Port enabled/disabled state can only be controlled by
Management Module.
362 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
VRRP
VRRP
BGP
LOG_NOTICE (continued)
SYSTEM Management Port can only be enabled/disabled by the Management
Module
Cannot change the Management IP Interface VLAN
Cannot enable/disable the Management IP Interface
Cannot enable/disable forwarding on Management IP Interface
Cannot delete the Management IP Interface
Management VLAN can not be disabled
Default VLAN can not be deleted
Management VLAN can not be deleted
Rebooted <cause and time of reboot>
Management Port cannot be configured as a Monitor Port.
Virtual router <ip_address> is now master
Virtual router <ip_address> is now backup
Session established with <BGP_peer_ip_address>
LOG_INFO
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
New configuration applied
New configuration saved
Unsaved changes reverted
Could not revert unsaved changes
" <image1|image2> downloaded from host <ip_address>, file
<file_name> <software_version>"
Serial EEPROM downloaded from host <ip_address> file <file_name>
<login_level> login on Console
" <login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console"
<login_level> login from host <ip_address>
" <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Telnet/SSH."
40M2420, April 2007 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 363
Alteon OS Command Reference
SSH
SSH
SSH
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
VRRP
LOG_INFO (continued)
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
MGMT
SSH
SSH
Unsupported GBIC refused
Flash Write Error. Failed to allocate buffer. Quitting
Flash Write Error. Trying again
Flash Write Error. Failed to allocate buffer. Quitting
Flash Write Error
FLASH ERROR - invalid address used scp <login_level> login
" scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">"
Server key autogen starts
Server key autogen completes
Server key autogen timer timeouts
Synchronizing to <host> ...
Config Synchronization Transmit Successful.
New configuration validated
New configuration applied
New configuration did not save (rc=<code>)
New configuration saved
Restoring Current Config.
Synchronizing from <host> ...
Config Synchronization Receive Successful.
364 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 40M2420, April 2007
40M2420, April 2007
Appendix B
Alteon OS SNMP Agent
The Alteon OS SNMP agent supports SNMP version 3. Security is provided through SNMP community strings. The default community strings are “public” for SNMP GET operation and
“private” for SNMP SET operation. The community string can be modified only through the
Command Line Interface (CLI). Alteon WebSystems is registered as Vendor 1872. Detailed
SNMP MIBs and trap definitions of the Alteon OS SNMP agent are contained in the following
Alteon OS enterprise MIB document:
GbESM-1G-2223.mib
Users may specify up to two trap hosts for receiving SNMP Traps. The agent will send the
SNMP Trap to the specified hosts when appropriate. Traps are not sent if there is no host specified.
Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following standard MIBs:
rfc1213.mib
rfc1215.mib
rfc1493.mib
rfc1573.mib
rfc1643.mib
rfc1757.mib
rfc1907.mib
rfc2037.mib
rfc2571 .mib
rfc2572.mib
rfc2573.mib
rfc2574.mib
rfc2575.mib
rfc2576.mib
365
Alteon OS Command Reference
Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following generic traps as defined in RFC 1215:
ColdStart
WarmStart
LinkDown
LinkUp
AuthenticationFailure
The SNMP agent also supports two Spanning Tree traps as defined in RFC 1493:
NewRoot
TopologyChange
The following are the enterprise SNMP traps supported in Alteon OS:
Table 9-10 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps
Trap Name Description altSwPrimaryPowerSupplyFailure Signifies that the primary power supply failed. altSwFanFailure Signifies that the fan has failed. altSwDefGwUp altSwDefGwDown altSwDefGwInService altSwDefGwNotInService altSwVrrpNewMaster altSwVrrpNewBackup altSwVrrpAuthFailure altSwLoginFailure
Signifies that the default gateway is alive.
Signifies that the default gateway is down.
Signifies that the default gateway is up and in service
Signifies that the default gateway is alive but not in service
The newMaster trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to 'Master' state.
The newBackup trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to 'Backup' state.
A vrrpAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet has been received from a router whose authentication key or authentication type conflicts with this router's authentication key or authentication type. Implementation of this trap is optional.
A altSwLoginFailure trap signifies that someone failed to enter a valid username/password combination.
366 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Table 9-10 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps
Trap Name altSwTcpHoldDown altSwTempExceedThreshold
Description
A altSwTcpHoldDown trap signifies that new TCP connection requests from a particular client will be blocked for a pre-determined amount of time since the rate of new TCP connections from that client has reached a pre-determined threshold.
A altSwTempExceedThreshold trap signifies that the switch temperature has exceeded maximum safety limits.
40M2420, April 2007 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 367
Alteon OS Command Reference
Working with Switch Images and
Configuration Files
This section describes how to use MIB calls to work with switch images and configuration files. You can use a standard SNMP tool to perform the actions, using the MIBs listed in
The examples in this section use the MIB name, but you can also use the OID.
Table 9-11 lists the MIBS used to perform operations associated with the GbESM Switch
Image and Configuration files. These MIBS are contained within in the file “aosswitch.mib”
Table 9-11 MIBs for Switch Image and Configuration Files
MIB Name agTftpServer agTftpImage
MIB OID
1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.1.0
1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.2.0
agTftpImageFileName 1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.3.0
agTftpCfgFileName 1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.4.0
agTftpDumpFileName agTftpAction
1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.5.0
1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.6.0
agTftpLastActionStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.7.0
agTftpUserName 1.3.6.1.4.1872.2.5.1.1.7.9.0
agTftpPassword agTftpTSDumpFileName
1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.1.1.7.10.0
1.3.6.1.4.1.1872.2.5.1.1.7.11.0
The following SNMP actions can be performed using the MIBs listed in Table 9-11
.
Load a new Switch image (boot or running) from a FTP/TFTP server
Load a previously saved switch configuration from a FTP/TFTP server
Save the switch configuration to a FTP/TFTP server
Save a switch dump to a FTP/TFTP server
368 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Loading a new switch image
To load a new switch image with the name “MyNewImage-1.img” into image2, follow the steps below. This example assumes you have a FTP/TFTP server at 192.168.10.10.
1.
Set the FTP/TFTP server address where the switch image resides:
Set agTftpServer.0 “192.168.10.10”
2.
Set the area where the new image will be loaded:
Set agTftpImage.0 “image2”
3.
Set the name of the image:
Set agTftpImageFileName.0 “MyNewImage-1.img”
4.
Initiate the transfer. To transfer a switch image, enter 2 (gtimg):
Set agTftpAction.0 “2”
5.
If you are using an FTP server, enter a username:
Set agTftpUserName.0 “MyName”
6.
If you are using an FTP server, enter a password:
Set agTftpPassword.0 “MyPassword”
40M2420, April 2007 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 369
Alteon OS Command Reference
Loading a saved switch configuration
To load a saved switch configuration with the name “MyRunningConfig.cfg” into the switch, follow the steps below. This example assumes you have a TFTP server at 192.168.10.10.
1.
Set the FTP/TFTP server address where the switch Configuration File resides:
Set agTftpServer.0 “192.168.10.10”
2.
Set the name of the configuration file:
Set agTftpCfgFileName.0 “MyRunningConfig.cfg”
3.
Initiate the transfer. To restore a running configuration, enter 3:
Set agTftpAction.0 “3”
4.
If you are using an FTP server, enter a username:
Set agTftpUserName.0 “MyName”
5.
If you are using an FTP server, enter a password:
Set agTftpPassword.0 “MyPassword”
Saving the switch configuration
To save the switch configuration to a FTP/TFTP server follow the steps below. This example assumes you have a FTP/TFTP server at 192.168.10.10.
1.
Set the FTP/TFTP server address where the configuration file is saved:
Set agTftpServer.0 “192.168.10.10”
2.
Set the name of the configuration file:
Set agTftpCfgFileName.0 “MyRunningConfig.cfg”
3.
Initiate the transfer. To save a running configuration file, enter 4:
Set agTftpAction.0 “4”
4.
If you are using an FTP server, enter a username:
Set agTftpUserName.0 “MyName”
5.
If you are using an FTP server, enter a password:
Set agTftpPassword.0 “MyPassword”
370 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference
Saving a switch dump
To save a switch dump to a FTP/TFTP server, follow the steps below. This example assumes you have a FTP/TFTP server at 192.168.10.10.
1.
Set the FTP/TFTP server address where the configuration will be saved:
Set agTftpServer.0 “192.168.10.10”
2.
Set the name of dump file:
Set agTftpDumpFileName.0 “MyDumpFile.dmp”
3.
Initiate the transfer. To save a dump file, enter 5:
Set agTftpAction.0 “5”
4.
If you are using an FTP server, enter a username:
Set agTftpUserName.0 “MyName”
5.
If you are using an FTP server, enter a password:
Set agTftpPassword.0 “MyPassword”
40M2420, April 2007 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 371
Alteon OS Command Reference
372 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 40M2420, April 2007
Glossary
DIP (Destination IP
Address)
Dport (Destination
Port)
The destination IP address of a frame.
The destination port (application socket: for example, http-80/https-443/DNS-53)
NAT (Network Address
Translation)
Any time an IP address is changed from one source IP or destination IP address to another address, network address translation can be said to have taken place. In general, half NAT is when the destination IP or source IP address is changed from one address to another.
Full NAT is when both addresses are changed from one address to another. No NAT is when neither source nor destination IP addresses are translated.
Preemption In VRRP, preemption will cause a Virtual Router that has a lower priority to go into backup should a peer Virtual Router start advertising with a higher priority.
Priority
Proto (Protocol)
In VRRP, the value given to a Virtual Router to determine its ranking with its peer(s). Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 254. Default is 100. A higher number will win out for master designation.
The protocol of a frame. Can be any value represented by a 8-bit value in the IP header adherent to the IP specification (for example, TCP, UDP, OSPF, ICMP, and so on.)
SIP (Source IP Address) The source IP address of a frame.
SPort (Source Port) The source port (application socket: for example, HTTP-80/HTTPS-443/DNS-53).
Tracking In VRRP, a method to increase the priority of a virtual router and thus master designation
(with preemption enabled). Tracking can be very valuable in an active/active configuration.
You can track the following:
ifs: Active IP interfaces on the GbE Switch Module (increments priority by 2 for each)
ports: Active ports on the same VLAN (increments priority by 2 for each)
vrs: Number of virtual routers in master mode on the switch
40M2420, April 2007 373
Alteon OS Command Reference
VIR (Virtual Interface
Router)
A VRRP address that is an IP interface address shared between two or more virtual routers.
Virtual Router
VRID (Virtual Router
Identifier)
A shared address between two devices utilizing VRRP, as defined in RFC 2338. One virtual router is associated with an IP interface. This is one of the IP interfaces that the switch is assigned. All IP interfaces on the GbE Switch Module must be in a VLAN. If there is more than one VLAN defined on the GbE Switch Module, then the VRRP broadcasts will only be sent out on the VLAN of which the associated IP interface is a member.
In VRRP, a value between 1 and 1024 that is used by each virtual router to create its MAC address and identify its peer for which it is sharing this VRRP address. The standard
VRRP MAC address as defined in the RFC is 00-00-5E-00-01-{VRID}. For virtual routers with a VRID greater than 255, the following block of MAC addresses is allocated:
00:0F:6A:9A:40:00 - 00:0F:6A:9A:47:FF
If you have a VRRP address shared between two switches, then the VRID must be identical on both switches so each virtual router on each switch knows with whom to share.
VRRP (Virtual Router
Redundancy Protocol)
A protocol that acts very similarly to Cisco's proprietary HSRP address sharing protocol.
The reason for both of these protocols is so devices have a next hop or default gateway that is always available. Two or more devices sharing an IP interface are either advertising or listening for advertisements. These advertisements are sent via a broadcast message to an address such as 224.0.0.18.
With VRRP, one switch is considered the master and the other the backup. The master is always advertising via the broadcasts. The backup switch is always listening for the broadcasts. Should the master stop advertising, the backup will take over ownership of the
VRRP IP and MAC addresses as defined by the specification. The switch announces this change in ownership to the devices around it by way of a Gratuitous ARP, and advertisements. If the backup switch didn't do the Gratuitous ARP the Layer 2 devices attached to the switch would not know that the MAC address had moved in the network. For a more detailed description, refer to RFC 2338.
374 Glossary 40M2420, April 2007
Index
Symbols
/ command .......................................................... 50
[ ] ....................................................................... 16
A abbreviating commands (CLI) .............................. 54 access control user ........................................................... 204
ACL Port menu ................................................. 211
ACL statistics ........................................... 160, 161 active configuration block .......................... 173, 336 active IP interface .............................................. 304 active port
VLAN ....................................................... 304 active switch configuration gtcfg ......................................................... 321 ptcfg ......................................................... 321 restoring .................................................... 321 active switch, saving and loading configuration .... 321 addr
IP route tag .................................................. 97 administrator account ..................................... 27, 32 admpw (system option) ...................................... 204 aging
STP bridge option ....................................... 234
STP information ..................................... 83, 86 apply (global command) ..................................... 172 applying configuration changes ........................... 172 autoconfiguration link ............................................................. 37 auto-negotiation enable/disable on port .................................. 210 setup ........................................................... 37 autonomous system filter action .......................... 265
40M2420, April 2007 autonomous system filter path action ........................................................ 265 as .............................................................. 265 aspath ........................................................ 265
B backup configuration block ......................... 173, 336 banner (system option) ....................................... 176
BBI .................................................................... 19
BGP configuration .............................................. 279 eBGP ......................................................... 279 filters, aggregation configuration ................... 284 iBGP ......................................................... 279 in route ...................................................... 282
IP address, border router .............................. 281
IP route tag ................................................... 97 keep-alive time ........................................... 281 peer ........................................................... 279 peer configuration ....................................... 281 redistribution configuration .......................... 283 remote autonomous system ........................... 281 router hops ................................................. 282
BLOCKING (port state) ....................................... 84 boot options menu ............................................. 329 bootstrap protocol .............................................. 296
Border Gateway Protocol ..................................... 97 configuration .............................................. 279
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) operations-level options ............................... 328
BPDU. See Bridge Protocol Data Unit.
bridge parameter menu, for STP .......................... 231 bridge priority ............................................... 83, 89
Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU)
STP transmission frequency
................. 83, 89
......................... 233
Bridge Spanning-Tree parameters ....................... 233
1
Alteon OS Command Reference broadcast
IP route tag ...................................................97
IP route type .................................................96
Browser-Based Interface .......................................19
C capture dump information to a file .......................349
Cisco Ether Channel ...........................................239
CIST information .................................................88
clear
ARP entries ................................................345
dump information ........................................350
FDB entry ...................................................343
routing table ................................................346
command (help) ...................................................50
Command-Line Interface (CLI) ....... 19 to 29, 32, 47 commands abbreviations .................................................54
conventions used in this manual ......................16
global commands ...........................................50
shortcuts .......................................................54
stacking ........................................................54
tab completion ...............................................54
2 Index configuration
802.1x
....................................................... 219 administrator password ................................ 204 apply changes ............................................. 172
CIST ......................................................... 227 default gateway interval, for health checks ..... 255 default gateway IP address ........................... 255 dump command .......................................... 320 failover ...................................................... 244 flow control ................................................ 210
Gigabit Ethernet .......................................... 208
IGMP ........................................................ 285
IP static route ..................................... 256, 257
LDAP ........................................................ 184 operating mode ........................................... 210 port link speed ............................................ 210 port mirroring ............................................. 318 port trunking .............................................. 239
RIP ........................................................... 266 save changes .............................................. 173 setup ......................................................... 320 setup command ........................................... 320
SNMP ....................................................... 188 switch IP address ........................................ 254
TACACS+ ................................................. 181 user password ............................................. 204 view changes .............................................. 172
VLAN default (PVID) ................................. 208
VLAN IP interface ...................................... 254
VLAN tagging ............................................ 208
VRRP ........................................................ 297 configuration block active ........................................................ 336 backup ....................................................... 336 factory ....................................................... 336 selection .................................................... 336 configuration menu ............................................ 169 configuring routing information protocol ............. 267 connecting via console ................................................... 20 console port connecting ................................................... 20
COS queue information ...................................... 114 cost
STP information ............................... 84, 86, 89
STP port option .......................................... 235
CPU statistics .................................................... 159
CPU utilization .................................................. 159 cur (system option) ............................ 180, 187, 202
40M2420, April 2007
D date setup ........................................................... 35 system option ............................................. 175 daylight savings time ......................................... 186 debugging ......................................................... 339 default gateway information .................................................. 94 interval, for health checks ............................ 255 default password ................................................. 27 designated port.
................................................... 99 diff (global) command, viewing changes ............. 172 direct (IP route type) ............................................ 96 directed broadcasts ............................................ 260
DISABLED (port state) ........................................ 84 disconnect idle timeout ........................................ 29
DNS statistics ................................................... 142 downloading software ........................................ 331 dump configuration command ............................... 320 maintenance ............................................... 339 state information ......................................... 351 duplex mode link status ............................................ 56, 116 dynamic routes .................................................. 346
E
End-to-End flow control ..................................... 175
EtherChannel as used with port trunking ............................ 239
F factory configuration block ................................. 336 factory default configuration ..................... 28, 32, 33 failover configuration .............................................. 244
FDB statistics .................................................... 135
Final Steps .......................................................... 41 first-time configuration ......................... 28, 31 to 46 fixed
IP route tag .................................................. 97 flag field ............................................................. 99 flow control ................................................ 56, 116 configuring ................................................ 210 setup ........................................................... 36 forwarding configuration
IP forwarding configuration ......................... 260
40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference forwarding database (FDB) ................................. 339
Forwarding Database Information Menu ................ 76
Forwarding Database Menu ................................ 343 forwarding state (FWD) ..................... 77, 83, 89, 91 fwd (STP bridge option) ..................................... 234
FwdDel (forward delay), bridge port .......... 83, 86, 89
G
GEA Port mapping ............................................ 118 gig (Port Menu option) ....................................... 208
Gigabit Ethernet configuration .............................................. 208
Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link ............................ 208 global commands ................................................. 50
Greenwich ........................................................ 186
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) ............................ 186 gtcfg (TFTP load command) ............................... 321
H health checks default gateway interval, retries ..................... 255 retry, number of failed health checks ............. 255 hello
STP information ............................... 83, 86, 89 help .................................................................... 50 hot-standby failover ........................................... 302 hprompt system option ............................................. 176
HTTPS ............................................................. 207
I
ICMP statistics .................................................. 142 idle timeout overview ...................................................... 29
IEEE 802.1s
........................................................ 85
IEEE 802.1w
....................................................... 85
IEEE standards
802.1d
................................................. 83, 231
802.1s
........................................................ 225
802.1w
....................................................... 225
802.1x
......................................................... 80
IGMP Snooping ................................................. 286
IGMP statistics .................................................. 148 image downloading ............................................... 331 software, selecting ....................................... 334 indirect (IP route type) ......................................... 96
Index 3
Alteon OS Command Reference
Information
IGMP Information .......................................109
IGMP Multicast Router Information ..............110
Trunk Group Information ...............................91
information
802.1p
........................................................113
Information Menu ................................................55
Ingress Back Pressure (IBP) flow control .............176
Interface change stats ..........................................153
IP address ............................................................39
ARP information ...........................................98
configuring default gateway ..........................255
IP interface ...................................................39
IP configuration via setup .....................................39
IP forwarding directed broadcasts ......................................260
IP forwarding information .....................................94
IP Information ...................................................108
IP Information Menu ............................................94
IP interface ........................................................254
active .........................................................304
configuring address ......................................254
configuring VLANs .....................................254
IP interfaces ...................................................39, 96 information ...................................................94
IP route tag ...................................................97
priority increment value (ifs) for VRRP ..........306
IP network filter configuration .............................261
IP Route Manipulation Menu
IP routing
..............................346
............................................................39
tag parameters ...............................................97
IP Static Route Menu ..................................256, 257
IP statistics ........................................................139
IP subnet mask .....................................................39
IP switch processor statistics ...............................137
L
LACP ...............................................................242
Layer 2 Menu ......................................................74
Layer 3 Menu ......................................................93
LEARNING (port state) ............................83, 84, 89 link speed, configuring .......................................210
Link Aggregation Control Protocol ......................242
link status ............................................................56
command ....................................................116
duplex mode .........................................56, 116 port speed .............................................56, 116
4 Index
Link Status Information ..................................... 116 linkt (SNMP option) .......................................... 189
LISTENING (port state) ....................................... 84 lmask (routing option) .......................................... 94 lnet (routing option) ............................................. 94 local (IP route type) ............................................. 96 log syslog messages .......................................... 177
M
MAC (media access control) address .. 58, 70, 76, 98,
343
Main Menu ......................................................... 48
Command-Line Interface (CLI) ...................... 28 summary ...................................................... 49
Maintenance
IGMP ........................................................ 347
IGMP Groups ............................................. 347
IGMP Multicast Routers .............................. 348
Maintenance Menu ............................................ 339 management module ............................................ 20
Management Processor (MP) .............................. 344 display MAC address .............................. 58, 70 manual style conventions ..................................... 16 martian
IP route tag (filtered) ..................................... 97 mask
IP route type (filtered out) .............................. 96
IP interface subnet address ........................... 254 mation ................................................................ 91
MaxAge (STP information) ...................... 83, 86, 89
MD5 cryptographic authentication ...................... 271
MD5 key .......................................................... 274 media access control. See MAC address.
meter
ACL .......................................................... 212
Miscellaneous Debug Menu ............................... 344 monitor port ...................................................... 318 mp packet ........................................................ 157
MP. See Management Processor.
multicast
IP route type ................................................. 96
Multiple Spanning Tree configuration .............................................. 225 mxage (STP bridge option) ................................. 233
40M2420, April 2007
N nbr change statistics ........................................... 152 network management ........................................... 19 notice ............................................................... 175
NTP server menu ............................................... 186
NTP synchronization ......................................... 186
NTP time zone .................................................. 186
O online help .......................................................... 50 operating mode, configuring ............................... 210 operations menu ................................................ 323 operations-level BGP options ............................. 328 operations-level IP options ................................. 328
Operations-Level Port Options .................... 325, 326 operations-level VRRP options ........................... 327 ospf area index .......................................... 269, 271 authentication key ....................................... 274 configuration .............................................. 269 cost of the selected path ............................... 273 cost value of the host ................................... 276 dead, declaring a silent router to be down ....... 274 dead, health parameter of a hello packet ......... 275 export ........................................................ 277 fixed routes ................................................ 279 general ...................................................... 150 global ........................................................ 150 hello, authentication parameter of a hello packet ...
Alteon OS Command Reference
275 host entry configuration ............................... 276 host routes .................................................. 269 interface ..................................................... 269 interface configuration ................................. 273 link state database ....................................... 269
Not-So-Stubby Area .................................... 271 priority value of the switch interface .............. 273 range number .............................................. 269 redistribution menu ..................................... 269 route redistribution configuration .................. 277 spf, shortest path first ................................... 271 stub area .................................................... 271 summary range configuration ....................... 272 transit area .................................................. 271 transit delay ................................................ 274 type ........................................................... 271 virtual link .................................................. 269 virtual link configuration .............................. 275 virtual neighbor, router ID ............................ 275
OSPF Database Information ............................... 104
OSPF general .................................................... 102
OSPF General Information ................................. 103
OSPF Information .............................................. 102
OSPF Information Route Codes .......................... 106
OSPF statistics .................................................. 149
P panic command ................................................... 351 switch (and Maintenance Menu option) .......... 340 parameters tag ............................................................... 97 type ............................................................. 96
Password user access control ....................................... 204 password administrator account ..................................... 27 default ......................................................... 27 user account ................................................. 27
VRRP authentication ................................... 305 passwords ........................................................... 27 ping .................................................................... 51 poisoned reverse, as used with split horizon ......... 267 port configuration .............................................. 208 port flow control. See flow control.
40M2420, April 2007 Index 5
Alteon OS Command Reference
Port Menu configuration options ...................................208
configuring Gigabit Ethernet (gig) .................208
port mirroring configuration ...............................................318
Port number .......................................................116
port speed ....................................................56, 116 port states
UNK (unknown) port trunking
...........................................77
description ..................................................239
port trunking configuration ..................................239
ports configuration .................................................36
disabling (temporarily) .................................211
information .................................................117
IP status ........................................................94
membership of the VLAN ........................75, 92 priority ...................................................83, 89
STP port priority ..........................................235
VLAN ID .............................................57, 117 preemption assuming VRRP master routing authority .......301
virtual router .......................................300, 303 priority virtual router ...............................................303
priority (STP port option) ....................................235
prisrv primary radius server ...................................179
Private VLAN ....................................................251
ptcfg (TFTP save command) ...............................321
PVID (port VLAN ID) ..................................57, 117
PVLAN .............................................................249
pwd ....................................................................51
Q quiet (screen display option) ..................................51
R
RADIUS server menu .........................................179
read community string (SNMP option) .................189
reboot ....................................................... 340, 351 receive flow control ..................................... 36, 210 reference ports ..................................................... 77 referenced port .................................................... 99 re-mark ............................................................. 213 restarting switch setup .......................................... 34 retries radius server ............................................... 179 retry health checks for default gateway .................. 255 rip
IP route tag .................................................. 97
RIP Information ................................................ 107
RIP information ................................................. 107
RIP. See Routing Information Protocol.
route statistics ................................................... 141 router hops ........................................................ 282 routing information protocol configuration .............................................. 267
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ...................... 97 options ...................................................... 267 poisoned reverse ......................................... 267 split horizon ............................................... 267 version 1 parameters ............................ 266, 267
RSTP information ................................................ 85 rx flow control .................................................... 36
Rx/Tx statistics .................................................. 151
S save (global command) ...................................... 173 noback option ............................................. 173 save command ................................................... 336 secret radius server ............................................... 179 secsrv secondary radius server ................................ 179
Secure Shell ...................................................... 178 setup configuration .............................................. 320 setup command, configuration ............................ 320
6 Index 40M2420, April 2007
setup facility ................................................. 28, 31
IP configuration ............................................ 39
IP subnet mask ............................................. 39 port auto-negotiation mode ............................ 37 port configuration ......................................... 36 port flow control ........................................... 36 restarting ..................................................... 34
Spanning-Tree Protocol ................................. 36 starting ........................................................ 32 stopping ....................................................... 34 system date .................................................. 35 system time .................................................. 35
VLAN name ................................................ 38
VLAN tagging ............................................. 37
VLANs ....................................................... 38 shortcuts (CLI) .................................................... 54 snap traces buffer ........................................................ 344
SNMP ........................................................ 19, 122 menu options .............................................. 189 set and get access ........................................ 189
SNMP Agent .................................................... 365
SNMP statistics ................................................. 162
SNMPv3 .......................................................... 190 software image ........................................................ 331 image file and version spanning tree
............................. 58, 71 configuration .............................................. 231
Spanning-Tree Protocol ....................................... 91 bridge aging option ..................................... 234 bridge parameters ....................................... 233 bridge priority ........................................ 83, 89 port cost option ........................................... 235 port priority option ...................................... 235 root bridge ..................................... 83, 89, 233 setup (on/off) ................................................ 36 switch reset effect ....................................... 337 split horizon ...................................................... 267 stacking commands (CLI) .................................... 54 starting switch setup ............................................ 32 state (STP information) ............................ 84, 86, 90 static
IP route tag .................................................. 97 static route rem ........................................................... 256 statis route add ............................................................ 256
40M2420, April 2007
Alteon OS Command Reference statistics management processor ................................. 156
Statistics Menu .................................................. 121 stopping switch setup ........................................... 34 subnet address maskconfiguration
IP subnet address ........................................ 254 subnet mask ........................................................ 39 subnets ............................................................... 39
IP interface ................................................. 254 switch name and location ................................... 58, 70 resetting ..................................................... 337 syslog system host log configuration ....................... 177 system contact (SNMP option) ................................ 189 date and time .......................................... 58, 70 information .................................................. 70 location (SNMP option) ............................... 189
System Information .............................................. 58
System Maintenance Menu ................................. 342 system options admpw (administrator password) ................... 204 cur (current system parameters) ..... 180, 187, 202 date ........................................................... 175 hprompt ..................................................... 176 login banner ............................................... 176 time ........................................................... 175 tnport ......................................................... 202 usrpw (user password) ................................. 204 wport ......................................................... 201 system parameters, current .................. 180, 187, 202
T tab completion (CLI) ............................................ 54 tacacs ............................................................... 181
TACACS+ ........................................................ 181
TCP .................................................................. 138
TCP statistics ............................................ 145, 158
Telnet configuring switches using ........................... 320
Telnet support optional setup for Telnet support ..................... 42 text conventions ................................................... 16
TFTP ................................................................ 333
PUT and GET commands ............................ 321
TFTP server ...................................................... 321 thash ................................................................. 240
Index 7
Alteon OS Command Reference time setup ............................................................35
system option ..............................................175
timeout radius server ...............................................180
timeouts idle connection ..............................................29
timers kickoff ....................................................153
tnport system option ..............................................202
trace buffer ........................................................344
traceroute ............................................................51
Tracking
VRRP ........................................................299
transmit flow control ....................................36, 210
Trunk Group Information ......................................91
trunk hash algorithm ...........................................240
tx flow control .....................................................36
type of area ospf ...........................................................271
type parameters ....................................................96
typographic conventions, manual ...........................16
tzone .................................................................186
U
UCB statistics ....................................................158
UDP .................................................................138
UDP statistics ....................................................147
unknown (UNK) port state ....................................77
Unscheduled System Dump .................................351
upgrade, switch software .....................................331
user access control configuration .........................204
user account .........................................................27
usrpw (system option) .........................................204
Uuencode Flash Dump ........................................349
V verbose ...............................................................51
virtual router description ..................................................299
priority .......................................................303
tracking criteria ...........................................301
virtual router group
VRRP priority tracking .................................302
virtual router group configuration ........................302
virtual router group priority tracking ....................304
8 Index
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) authentication parameters for IP interfaces ..... 305 group options (prio) ..................................... 303 operations-level options ............................... 327 password, authentication .............................. 305 priority election for the virtual router ............. 300 priority tracking options ....................... 281, 301
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration 297 virtual routers increasing priority level of ............................ 301 master preemption (preem) ........................... 303 master preemption (prio) .............................. 300 priority increment values (vrs) for VRRP ....... 306
VLAN active port .................................................. 304 configuration .............................................. 247
VLAN tagging port configuration ....................................... 208 port restrictions ........................................... 248 setup ........................................................... 37
VLANs ............................................................... 39
ARP entry information .................................. 98 information .................................................. 92 interface ....................................................... 40 name ..................................................... 75, 92 name setup ................................................... 38 port membership ..................................... 75, 92 setting default number (PVID) ...................... 208 setup ........................................................... 38 tagging .................................. 37, 57, 117, 248
VLAN Number ............................................. 92
VRID (virtual router ID) ............................ 299, 302
VRRP interface configuration ................................. 305 master advertisements .................................. 300 tracking ..................................................... 299 tracking configuration .................................. 306
VRRP Information ............................................. 112
VRRP master advertisements time interval ............................................... 303
VRRP statistics ................................................. 154
W watchdog timer .................................................. 340 weights setting virtual router priority values ............... 306 wport ................................................................ 201 write community string (SNMP option) ............... 189
40M2420, April 2007
பதிவிறக்கு
பொது இணைப்பு புதுப்பிக்கப்பட்டது
உங்கள் அரட்டைக்கான பொது இணைப்பு புதுப்பிக்கப்பட்டுள்ளது. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
ஆவண பொது இணைப்பு
விளம்பரம்